Volume 11 iBook

Volume 11 iBook

Electrical Sector Solutions Volume 11: Vehicle and Commercial Controls Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Control Tab 1—Electronic Products . . . . ...

12MB Sizes 0 Downloads 5 Views

Recommend Documents

Volume 11 iBook - Eaton
occur, they are published in Eaton's Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton's Electrical Sect

COMESA News Volume 11
and Mr Ricardo Martinelli, President of the Republic of Panama. The first ever training workshop in public procurement a

The Shanachie Volume 11
living in Moosup and Wauregan in. Connecticut, bought a farm in Daw- son. The family had left COWlty. Mayo in 1848 and l

Volume 11 Acknowledgments - The Oncologist
Laurence Baker. Frank M. Balis. Bart Barlogie ... Eli Glatstein. Stefan Gluck. Richard Goldberg. David S. ... Stein Kaas

11th Volume Index 11. Cilt Dizini - JournalAgent
Ahmet Zülfikar Akelma, 633. Özgür Akgül, 565 .... Alp Burak Çatakoğlu, E-32. Yusuf Hakan Çavuşoğlu, 146 ... Mustafa Bilg

Band Music Volume 11 A - Molenaar Edition
In 2012 ontving McCartney de Million-Air Award van Broadcast Music, Inc. (BMI) vanwege .... the song was nominated for a

VOLUME 32 NOVEMBER 2011 NUMBER 11 MEETING
Nov 9, 2011 - TWiT TV has been attracting large audiences and has moved hundreds of viewers to start studying for their

Volume 8 Issue 11, Page c3
John Francis Walker, aged 25, of La Perouse, is receiving ... Perouse said Mr. Walker \vas a very good type of citizen.

Volume 11 - History of Anaesthesia Society
Walksham; Messrs Bree of Stmrket; Slater of Woolpit; Barsham of. Norton ..... the Bethal Hospital for Lunatics (now the

Appendices - Volume 11 Final Environmental Impact Statement
for Congressman Bob Smith at his field office in Medford. One-on-one ..... KLAMATH MACHINERY COMPANY. APPENDIX I - 19 ..

Electrical Sector Solutions

Volume 11:

Vehicle and Commercial Controls

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Control Tab 1—Electronic Products . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-1 Tab 2—Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-1 Tab 3—Special Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-1 Tab 4—Toggle Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-1 Tab 5—Dimmers and Wipers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-1 Tab 6—Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-1 Tab 7—Definitions and Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T7-1

11

Copyright Dimensions, Weights and Ratings Dimensions, weights and ratings given in this catalog are approximate and should not be used for construction purposes. Drawings containing exact dimensions are available upon request. All listed product specifications and ratings are subject to change without notice. Photographs are representative of production units.

Terms and Conditions All prices and discounts are subject to change without notice. When price changes occur, they are published in the Eaton Corporation Price and Availability Digest (PAD). All orders accepted by Eaton’s electrical sector are subject to the general terms and conditions as set forth in Appendix 1—Eaton Terms & Conditions.

Technical and Descriptive Publications This catalog contains brief technical data for proper selection of products. Further information is available in the form of technical information publications and illustrated brochures. If additional product information is required, contact your local Eaton Products Distributor, call 1-800-525-2000 or visit our Web site at www.eaton.com.

Compliance with Nuclear Regulation 10 CFR 21 Eaton products are sold as commercial grade products not intended for application in facilities or activities licensed by the United States Nuclear Regulatory Commission for atomic purposes, under 10 CFR 21. Further certification will be required for use of these products in a safety-related application in any nuclear facility licensed by the U.S. Nuclear Regulatory Commission.

WARNING The installation and use of Eaton products should be in accordance with the provisions of the U.S. National Electrical Code® and/or other local codes or industry standards that are pertinent to the particular end use. Installation or use not in accordance with these codes and standards could be hazardous to personnel and/or equipment. These catalog pages do not purport to cover all details or variations in equipment, nor to provide for every possible contingency to be met in connection with installation, operation or maintenance. Should further information be desired or should particular problems arise which are not covered sufficiently for the purchaser’s purposes, the matter should be referred to the local Eaton Products Distributor or Sales Office. The contents of this catalog shall not become part of or modify any prior or existing agreement, commitment or relationship. The sales contract contains the entire obligation of Eaton’s electrical sector. The warranty contained in the contract between the parties is the sole warranty of Eaton. Any statements contained herein do not create new warranties or modify the existing warranty.

Copyright ©2012, Eaton Corporation, All Rights Reserved.

Introduction

Eaton Corporation is a global leader in power distribution, power quality, control and automation, and monitoring products. At Eaton, we believe a reliable, efficient and safe power system is the foundation of every successful enterprise. Through innovative technologies, cutting-edge products and our highly skilled services team, we empower businesses around the world to achieve a powerful advantage. In addition, Eaton is committed to creating and maintaining powerful customer relationships built on a foundation of excellence. From the products we manufacture to our dedicated customer service and support, we know what’s important to you.

Solutions Eaton takes the complexity out of power systems management with a holistic and strategic approach, leveraging our industry-leading technology, solutions and services. We focus on the following three areas in all we do: ●

Reliability—maintain the appropriate level of power continuity without disruption or unexpected downtime



Efficiency—minimize energy usage, operating costs, equipment footprint and environmental impact



Safety—identify and mitigate electrical hazards to protect what you value most

Using the Eaton Catalog Library As we grow, it becomes increasingly difficult to include all products in one or two comprehensive catalogs. Knowing that each user has their specific needs, we have created a library of catalogs for our products that when complete, will contain 15 volumes. Since the volumes will continuously be a work in progress and updated, each volume will stand alone. Refer to our volume directory, MZ08100001E, for a quick glance of where to look for the products you need. The 15 volumes include: ●











Volume 1—Residential and Light Commercial (CA08100002E) Volume 2—Commercial Distribution (CA08100003E) Volume 3—Power Distribution and Control Assemblies (CA08100004E) Volume 4—Circuit Protection (CA08100005E) Volume 5—Motor Control and Protection (CA08100006E) Volume 6—Solid-State Motor Control (CA08100007E)











Volume 7—Logic Control, Operator Interface and Connectivity Solutions (CA08100008E) Volume 8—Sensing Solutions (CA08100010E) Volume 9—Original Equipment Manufacturer (CA08100011E) Volume 10—Enclosed Control (CA08100012E) Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls (CA08100013E)









Volume 12—Aftermarket, Renewal Parts and Life Extension Solutions (CA08105001E) Volume 13—Counters, Timers and Tachometers (CA08100015E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 14—Fuses (CA08100016E)—Available in electronic format only Volume 15—Solar Inverters and Electrical Balance of System (CA08100018E)

These volumes are not all-inclusive of every product, but they are meant to be an overview of our product lines. For our full range of product solutions and additional product information, consult Eaton.com/electrical and other catalogs and product guides in our literature library. These references include: ●

The Consulting Application Guide (CA08104001E)



The Eaton Power Quality Product Guide (COR01FYA)

If you don’t have the volume that contains the product or information that you are looking for, not to worry. You can access every volume of the catalog library at Eaton.com/electrical in the Literature Library. By installing our Automatic Tab Updater (ATU), you can be sure you always have the most recent version of each volume and tab.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012

www.eaton.com

i

Introduction

Contact Us If you need additional help, you can find contact information under the Customer Care heading of Eaton.com/electrical.

Product Selection Guide TAB 1—Electronic Products Description

Page

E31 eSM

V11-T1-2

E30 eSM

V11-T1-5

E32 eSM

V11-T1-8

E33 eSM

V11-T1-12

eVu

V11-T1-15

TAB 2—Rockers Description

Page

Introduction

V11-T2-2

NGR

V11-T2-8

SVR

V11-T2-32

Dual Motion Safety Switch

V11-T2-41

1500/2500

V11-T2-43

1600/2600

V11-T2-47

Rockette

V11-T2-54

8006/8007—EURO SR

V11-T2-62

8004/8005 Euro Full-Size

V11-T2-65

X Series

V11-T2-68

8064/8065 ESPORT

V11-T2-72

Accessories

V11-T2-76

Technical Data

V11-T2-78

Symbol Library

V11-T2-80

TAB 3—Special Devices

ii

Description

Page

High Capacity Switches

V11-T3-2

Panelboard Switches

V11-T3-3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

V11-T3-5

Locking Rocker

V11-T3-9

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012

www.eaton.com

Introduction

TAB 4—Toggle Switches Description

Page

Introduction

V11-T4-2

Military Purpose Toggles

V11-T4-3

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

V11-T4-9

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

V11-T4-11

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

V11-T4-20

X Series Toggles

V11-T4-24

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

V11-T4-27

Accessories

V11-T4-31

Technical Data

V11-T4-35

TAB 5—Dimmers and Wipers Description

Page

Paddle and Slide Controls

V11-T5-2

Rotary Wipers

V11-T5-4

TAB 6—Pushbuttons Description

Page

AC Rated

V11-T6-2

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

V11-T6-8

TAB 7—Definitions and Index Description

Page

Definitions

V11-T7-1

Index

V11-T7-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012

www.eaton.com

iii

Electronic Products E31 eSM—Multiplexed Keypad

1.1

E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.2 E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rockers

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplex Rocker Switch Units

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

V11-T1-3 V11-T1-3 V11-T1-4 V11-T1-4

V11-T1-5 V11-T1-5 V11-T1-5 V11-T1-6 V11-T1-7 V11-T1-7

V11-T1-8 V11-T1-8 V11-T1-8 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-10 V11-T1-11

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.5

V11-T1-2

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features and Benefits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.4

V11-T1-2

E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1.3

V11-T1-2

V11-T1-12 V11-T1-12 V11-T1-12 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-14

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Application Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15 V11-T1-15

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-1

1.1 1

Electronic Products E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

Contents Description E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 1

Page V11-T1-3 V11-T1-3 V11-T1-4 V11-T1-4

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Description

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Because your vehicle is continuously exposed to nature’s elements, we offer the latest in Eaton’s multiplexed line of switch product, the E31 Keypad eSM. Eaton’s E31 Keypad eSM multiplex switch module offers a flexible and sealed solution for high-density switch requirements in severe environments. The keypad can be configured with any graphic/switch, as well as with customerdefined illumination. For customers requiring additional switches, expansion modules can be used with no requirement for additional CAN nodes. For additional product flexibility and differentiated operator control the E31 Keypad eSM is designed to communicate with E32 rocker expansion modules.

Great for specialty vehicle, construction, and agricultural equipment markets. The eSM product is especially suitable for severe environmental applications and where there is a desire to move to a multiplexed solution to simplify wiring and control requirements. Typical applications are:

Key Features

Target Market Segments: ● Tractors ● Wheel loaders ● Refuse vehicles ● Concrete mixers ● Street sweepers ● Mining equipment ● Emergency vehicles ● Transit buses













1



1

● ●

1 1 1

Fully compliant with J1939/CAN 2.0b messaging IP68 degree of protection from front and rear of module Rocker and keypad expansion module capability Exceptional illumination characteristics ● LED backlighting of icons ● Four color daylightvisible indicators per switch ● Message-controlled dimming and flash rates Large switch surface area and alignment ridges for ease of gloved hand use Exceptional tactile and audible feedback of switch actuation Electrical/mechanical life to over 1,000,000 cycles 9–32 Vdc operating voltage Immunity per SAE J1455/1113 ● Power disturbance ● Radiated immunity ● Radiated emissions

1 1 V11-T1-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Advantages ●









Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of eight switches at one time as opposed to individually Reduced wire harness complexity; uses one harness to a controller, reducing wiring, connection point, and controller requirements Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in life-cycle over traditional electromechanical switches Front, rear, and panel sealing for harsh environments

Electronic Products E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

1.1

Catalog Number Selection

1

How To Order—E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Series E31 = Keypad

Rows 2 = 2 rows

E31

2

4 M

Communication M = Master (J1939 CAN 2.0b) E = Expansion (LIN)

4

W 1

Indicators 4 = Red, amber, green, blue G = Green O = Orange

CV

1

1

Backlighting W = White G = Green A = Amber

Indicators 1 = Indicators 2 = No indicators

Address (Master) 2 1 = Address 1 2 = Address 2 FF = Expansion

Icons 1 CV = Circle XX = No icon

Columns 4 = 4 columns

1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Selection

1

Master

1

E3124M4W1CV1

1

E31 Keypad eSM Master Module, 2X4 Basic Part

Indicators Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3124M

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

1

E3124M4W1CV1

2

E3124M4W1CV2

1

E3124M4W1XX1

2

E3124M4W1XX2

1

E3124MGG1CV1

2

E3124MGG1CV2

None

1

E3124MGG1XX1

2

E3124MGG1XX2

Circle

1

E3124MOA1CV1

2

E3124MOA1CV2

1

E3124MOA1XX1

2

E3124MOA1XX2

None

Green

Orange

Green

Amber

Circle

None

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Expansion E3124EGG1XXFF

1 E31 Keypad eSM Expansion Module, 2X4 Basic Part

Indicators Colors

Backlighting

Icon Graphic

Address

Catalog Number

E3124E

Red, amber, green, blue

White

Circle

FF

E3124E4W1CVFF

None Green

Green

Circle

Orange

Amber

Circle

1

E3124E4W1XXFF FF

None

None

1 1

E3124EGG1CVFF

1

E3124EGG1XXFF FF

E3124EOA1CVFF

1

E3124EOA1XXFF

1

Notes 1 Contact Eaton sales for custom graphics. 2 For use of multiple masters on 1-system. (Address 3-8 available as special order.)

1 1 1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-3

1.1

Technical Data and Specifications Message Structure

The interconnection between the master module and the controller uses a minimum four-wire harness with an additional two pins associated to expansion module interconnection. Wire sizes of 16–20 AWG can be accommodated with the Deutsch connector shown in the mating connector information.

Each CAN message contains 8 bytes of data. The first data byte is used to define the type of data carried in bytes 2 through 8. This difference compared to common J1939 message structure allows a single J1939 PGN address to support all of the data needed for switch status, LED status, system status, wake ON change, dimmer level, and all other data used by a master and expansion.

Master Wiring Harness

Expansion Wiring Harness

PIN

Function

PIN

1

Vbat

1

Vbat

2

Common

2

Common

1

3

CAN (+)

3

LIN

1

4

CAN (–)

4

5

Common

5

Common

LIN

6

Vbat

1 1 1 1 1 1

1

6

1

Dimensions

1

Deutsch DT Series connector

The Keypad eSM master module is capable of supporting Eaton’s E32 and E33 product line of rocker eSMs. The E32 and E33 product line is an abovepanel–style rocker switch module that contains any combination of rocker or indicator functionality with no additional CAN node requirement to the system. Similar to the keypad, the rocker module offers icon graphic illumination with up to four center indicator bar LEDs for status or mode. This product is also fully functional to support dimming and flashing capabilities through software command.

6-pin connector: DT06-6S ● EP11 (Black–Master) ● E008 (Gray–Expansion) 6-pin wedge lock: W6S Female terminal: 0462-201-16141 (16-18-20 AWG) Hole plug: 0413-217-1605 Crimper: HDT-48-00

Function E QU

1

30 I

(3.4 N-m) LB N-

1

E32 and E33 Rocker Expansion Modules

XIMUM T MA OR

1

Mating Connector Information

1 2

Master Module Wiring Harness

3

1

E31 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module

6 5 4

1

Electronic Products

6

XXXX XXXXXXXX MADE IN MEXICO

LIN

Approximate Dimensions in mm [in] Mounting Dimensions

1

E31 Keypad Master or Expansion Module Ø 50.8 [2.00]

1

Ø 5.54 [0.218] 2X

1

Backlit Daylight White Graphics Area—8X

15.5 [0.61]

18.5 [0.73]

Lighted Indicators Optional As Required

15.5 [0.61]

1 1

34.70 [1.37]

66.2 [2.61]

69.40 [2.73]

1

16.0 [0.63]

1 1

97.2 [3.83]

1

15.2 [0.60] 17.1 [0.67]

1

17.7 [0.70]

1 1

32.2 [1.27] Max.

1 1 1 V11-T1-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

#10-24 UNC Nut and Lock Washer X2 (Included) Maximum Torque: 30 in-lbs (3.4 Nm)

Electronic Products E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.2

Contents

E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Description E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page V11-T1-6 V11-T1-7 V11-T1-7

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Description Tailored to meet the same look and feel of Eaton’s NGR product line, the E30 eSM offers the added benefits of multiplexed control and system simplification. The E30 eSM is a below-panel styled multiplexed rocker module capable of communicating via SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b. The modules are set up in a master-expansion configuration capable of supporting up to seven

1

Application Description expansion modules per master thus minimizing the impact on a controller to a single CAN node. Additionally, up to eight master modules per system can be accommodated. Communication with the expansion modules is done via a four-wire sub-bus. Multiplexing of switches can significantly reduce harness costs and complexity as well as improve installation cycle time.

Master Expansion Modules

The E30 eSM is especially suited for applications that require both high current independently wired switches using Eaton NGR switches as well as those applications realizing the benefits of multiplexing. The E30 eSM is styled to match the Eaton NGR switch for a consistent look and feel to your dash panel. The E30 eSM also has the capability of having a separate input for key switch and dimmer control functions to increase the flexibility of the product to interface seamlessly to your vehicle.

Customization of the E30 eSM is done by creating an application specific rocker with icons representing the function as well as by use of colored LEDs to highlight status. Two and three position as well as momentary or maintained circuits are identified using a sub-actuator to offer complete flexibility. Target Market Segments: Motor coach/bus ● Specialty vehicle ● Truck ●

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Selection Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. Master

1 1

Expansion

1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-5

1.2

Electronic Products E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

E30 eSM Specifications

1

Description Power supply

1

Operating temperature Storage temperature

1 1

Switch life cycle

1

SAE J1455 Description

Specification

12 Vdc regulated power, 1.5A

Dust test (Non-operational)

SAE J726 Course

–40° to 85°C

Mechanical vibration

2gs from 10 to 2 kHz

–40° to 85°C

Mechanical shock

30g

Sealing

IP42

Handling drop

1m, 3-axis

Illumination

Dependent or search lighting, customer defined LED color

Load dump transient

Table 4A and 4B

Specification

250,000 cycles

Over-voltage

48 Vdc for 5 mins

Mechanical life

250,000 cycles

Under-voltage

4 Vdc for 5 mins

Radiated immunity

1

Radiated emissions

SAE J1113/41, Class 2

Dimming

0–10 Vdc Analog Input (0 = 0% and 10V = 100% brightness)

Connectors

Delphi Micro VHT 15499927 Delphi Micro VHT 13513469

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

–28 Vdc for 5 mins

Electrical life

1 1

Reverse voltage

SAE J1113/21, 100 v/m

Power Supply

Communication

Message Contents

A regulated 12 Vdc power supply capable of providing 1.5A should be connected to terminals 1, 5 and 6 of the six-pole connector of the master module only. All connected expansion modules receive their supply power from the master module.

The communication to and from the master module is fully compliant to the SAE J1939/CAN 2.0b protocol.

Status

Diagnostics The LED indicators at the back of the modules show the status of the internal diagnostics as follows: Diagnostics

Byte

Status

Byte 1

Master module status

Byte 2

Expansion module 1 status

Byte 3

Expansion module 2 status

Byte 4

Expansion module 3 status

Transmission Repetition

Byte 5

Expansion module 4 status

Description

Specification

Byte 6

Expansion module 5 status

Transmission repetition rate

100 ms

Byte 7

Expansion module 6 status

Byte 8

Expansion module 7 status

Data length

8 bytes

Data page

0

PDU format PDU specific Default priority

5

Parameter group number

65440

The application-specific J1939 message parameters are as follows:

255

Within each status byte, the bits are assigned to the individual switches as follows:

The two status bit pairs represent the switch state in the following manner:

160

Bit

Switch

Bit

Switch

Bit 8&7

Not defined

00

Switch in DOWN position

Bit 5&6

Switch 1 status

01

Switch in MIDDLE position

Bit 3&4

Switch 2 status

10

Switch in UP position

Switch 3 status

11

Not defined

Label

Color

Meaning

1

J1939 ACTIVE

Red

CANbus active

1

MODULE ACTIVE

Amber

Sub bus active

Bit 1&2

1

SWITCH CHANGE

Green

Switch change

where the switches are numbered as shown below.

where the position assignment is as shown below.

Switches

Position Assignment

1

Rocker Position C B A

1 1

Switch 1

1

Switch 2

Switch 3

1 1

A = DOWN B = MIDDLE C = UP

1 V11-T1-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.2

Electronic Products E30 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Wiring

1

The master unit is connected using six unshielded wires. The connection from the master to the first expansion module and between any consecutive expansion modules is made using four unshielded wires.

1 1

Expansion Module

Master Module

1 J1939 ACTIVE

MODULE ACTIVE

MODULE ACTIVE

SWITCH CHANGE

1

SWITCH CHANGE

1 1 Pin 4 3 2 1

Function Vcc out Ground Sub bus + Sub bus –

Pin 6 5 4 3 2 1

Function Keyswitch Dimmer Ground J1939 + J1939 – +12 Vdc

Master wiring: ● Six unshielded wires

Pin 4 3 2 1

Function Vcc out Ground Sub bus + Sub bus –

Pin 4 3 2 1

1

Function Vcc in Ground Sub bus + Sub bus –

1 1 1

Expansion wiring: Four unshielded wires

1



1 Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Mounting Dimensions

1

E30 eSM Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

If you want to mount the modules in a panel, the opening in the panel should be rectangular, 2.835 in wide and 1.732 in high (72.00 mm wide and 44.00 mm high).

1 1

1.97 (50.0)

The panel thickness should be between 0.039 and 0.157 in (1.00 and 4.00 mm).

1 1

2.99 (76.0)

Panel Opening

1

0.47 (11.9)

0.10 (2.54)

1

1.734 (44.00)

1.85 (46.9)

1

1.22 (31.1)

1 1

2.835 (72.00)

1 2.82 (71.7)

1.70 (43.2)

1 1 1 1 1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-7

1.3 1

Electronic Products E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Contents

E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Description E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 1

Page V11-T1-9 V11-T1-9 V11-T1-10 V11-T1-11

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Description Multiplexed Master Module using a LIN sub bus to communicate with up to seven expansion modules. Offering a high level of flexibility, the above-panel electronic multiplex switch module (E32 eSM) covers your wide range of switch and indicator applications using standard or custom graphics, as well as a full range of circuits and illumination options. The above-panel E32 eSM has top, center and bottom LED lighting with software that offers advanced circuit and lighting flexibility, including dimming and flashing options via J1939 CANbus communication. The indicator bar can be lighted with up to four separate colors to indicate operational status, vehicle mode and faults. All standard combinations of maintained and momentary switch actions, matching indicator caps and dummy plugs, along with the complementary styled SVR electromechanical rocker switch are available to complete the offering.

Application Description Compared with electromechanical switches, multiplexed switch modules offer several advantages. ●







Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of three switches at one time versus individually Reduced wire harness complexity, using one harness to a controller to accommodate up to 24 switches and a three-wire interconnect between expansion and master modules Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional electromechanical switches (500k cycles)

Target Market Segments This product is targeted at the bus/coach, truck and specialty vehicle markets. The product is especially suitable where a customer has “gangs” of switches mounted in a panel or dashboard, and expansion modules can be connected easily to a master module. ● ● ● ● ● ●

On-road specialty vehicle EMS vehicles Street sweepers Recreational vehicles Motor coach/bus Refuse vehicles

1 1 1 V11-T1-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Features and Benefits ●





● ●



● ●









● ●

Fully compliant with J1939 CAN 2.0b messaging LED lighting in top, center and bottom positions Late point definition of circuit and rockers to reduce inventory and accommodate multiple application requirements 9–16 Vdc operating voltage 16–32 Vdc operating voltage IP53 degree of protection from the front Easy address assignment Immune to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances Front panel removable for ease of maintenance Sleep mode available to reduce current draw on the battery Wake on switch change configurable Decorative-style rocker with matching indicator option available Colored rocker options CAN controlled digital logic output—500 mA

1.3

Electronic Products E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Product Selection

1

Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

1 1 1

Status Bar

Icons

1 1 1

Modules Voltage

Module

Icon Lighting

Status Bar Lighting

Catalog Number

9–16V

Master

Amber

Amber

E321AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E321GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E321W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E322AAAAAAAAA01

Expansion

Indicator expansion

16–32V

Master

Expansion

Indicator expansion

Green

Green

E322GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E322W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E322AAAAAAAAAI7

Green

Green

E322GGGGGGGGGI7

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E322W4WW4WW4WI7

Amber

Amber

E323AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E323GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E323W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E324AAAAAAAAA01

Green

Green

E324GGGGGGGGG01

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E324W4WW4WW4W01

Amber

Amber

E324AAAAAAAAAI7

Green

Green

E324GGGGGGGGGI7

White

Red, Amber, Green, Blue

E324W4WW4WW4WI7

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Accessories Rockers

1

Circuit Sub-Actuators

Color

Description

Catalog Number

Color

Circuit (Up-Middle-Down)

Black

Full-throw actuator

53-7350

Black

On

On

None

61-4043

Half-throw up actuator

53-7350-2

Red

Momentary

On

None

61-4043-2

Half-throw down actuator

53-7350-3

Light blue

On

On

On

61-4043-3

Full-throw actuator

53-7350-4

White

Momentary

On

Momentary

61-4043-4

Half-throw up actuator

53-7350-5

Yellow

Momentary

On

On

61-4043-5

Half-throw down actuator

53-7350-6

Gray

On

None

On

61-4043-6

Red

Black

Catalog Number

Indicator

53-7354

Pink

Momentary

None

On

61-4043-7

Dummy plug

53-7354-2

Maroon

None

On

On

61-4043-8

Panel plug

17-24241

Light purple

None

On

Momentary

61-4043-9

Orange

On

On

Momentary

61-4043-10

Green

On

None

Momentary

61-4043-11

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-9

1.3 1 1

Electronic Products E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Wiring Master Module Wire Harness

The interconnection between master module and controller uses a simple four-wire harness with addressing specified by jumping between pins 6 to 9. An additional pin-out is provided for a 500 mA output if required.

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Expansion Module Wire Harness

Mating Connector Information

Mating Connector Information Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6 7 8 9 10 11 12

Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground CAN high CAN low 500 mA output Address 1 Address 2 Address 3 Address 4 No connect No connect No connect

Pin 1 2 3

Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus

Housing: ETN 28-6982 ● Amp/Tyco #1394048-1 ● ETN 49-7867 ● Amp/Tyco #2-1355524-3 ●

1 1 1

Master Address Assignment

Manufacturing Flexibility

The master switch module address is set using jumpers in the wire harness to connect the following pins:

E32 eSM offers a tremendous amount of flexibility including options for complete assemblies to be provided as well as late-point definable rocker and circuit. Individual components can be purchased independently and assembled to create any combination of circuits and icons which is especially suited for low volume/high mix applications minimizing inventory requirements. Rockers and indicators can also be laser-etched with custom icons by Eaton or other to accommodate application specific requirements. Contact your Eaton representative to discuss the Eaton solution further.

Master Address Assignment

Pin 1 2 3

Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus

Pin 1 2 3

Function VBAT (clamp 30) Ground LIN sub bus

Terminal Pins Connected

Address

6–7

A1

1

6–8

A2

1

6–9

A3

7–8

A4

1

7–9

A5

8–9

A6

1

6–7, 8–9

A7

6–8, 7–9

A8

V11-T1-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1

1 1

Terminal: ETN 28-6983 ● Amp/Tyco #1-1718346-1 Coding A ● ETN 80-20608 ● Amp/Tyco #963715-1 ●

1 1

The interconnection between modules uses a costeffective three-wire harness. This simplified wire harness reduces cost, weight and assembly labor for the enduser.

1 1 1 1 1

Electronic Products E32 eSM—Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.3

Dimensions

1

Approximate Dimensions in mm

1

Mounting Instructions The modules are easily mounted with plastic retention clips. Modules are mounted in a single, space-saving cutout, reducing assembly time and accommodating up to three switches in a compact design.

1

The unit will accommodate 1.5 to 3 mm panel thickness.

1 1 1 1

Mounting Dimensions 61.4 ± 0.2

1

38.2 Max.

1 1

37.6 ± 0.3

41.0 ± 0.3

1 1 1

3.90 4X

1

61.60

1 45° 38.20

1

4X

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-11

1.4 1

Electronic Products E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Contents Description E33 eSM—Keypad Multiplexed Switch Module Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1 1 1

Page V11-T1-13 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-13 V11-T1-14

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Description Sealed Multiplexed Master Module using a LIN sub bus to communicate with up to seven expansion modules. Eaton is pleased to introduce the newest line of multiplexed electronic Switch Modules (eSM), the E33 product line. The E33 eSM offers an increased level of flexibility over previous modules including:

1



1



1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1



Application Description Compared with electromechanical switches, multiplexed switch modules offer several advantages. ●



Fully sealed to IP68 from the front and rear Locking rocker options Palm guard option

The E33 eSM offers a complete range of switch circuits as well as indicator options to meet all your control requirements. Similar to the E32 eSM product line, the E33 eSM includes individual icon lighting as well as a multi-color center indicator option allowing for steady state, flashing and dimming controlled via messaging. Additional flexibility is available by using the Eaton IP68 sealed SVR switch line for high-current, hard-wired applications in conjunction with our multiplexed solution.







Reduced assembly labor due to ease of installation, allowing for mounting and connection of three switches at one time versus individually Reduced wire harness complexity, using one harness to a controller to accommodate up to 24 switches and a three-wire interconnect between expansion and master modules Reduced harness size offers an overall reduction in weight, improving operational efficiency of the equipment Increase in switch lifecycle over traditional electromechanical switches (500k cycles) Reduced connections resulting in less possible failure points

Target Market Segments This product is targeted at harsh environment applications where a ruggedized product is needed to meet demanding requirements. Additionally, applications where there is concern over inadvertent switch actuation driving the need for guarding or locking features are also well-suited. Typical applications include: ● ● ● ● ●

Construction equipment Agricultural equipment Specialty vehicle Material handling Emergency vehicle School and transit bus

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

V11-T1-12





● ●



● ●

● ●

1 1

Features and Benefits

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com











Fully compliant with J1939 CAN 2.0b messaging IP68 degree of protection front and rear 9–32 Vdc rated Immune to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances Top, bottom and full guard option available Locking rocker available Front panel removable for ease of maintenance Sleep mode available to reduce current draw on the battery Wake on switch change configurable LED lighting in top, centerindicator and bottom position Decorative style rocker with matching indicator option Late point definition of circuit and rockers to reduce inventory Diagnostics

Electronic Products E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

1.4

Product Selection

1

Note: All fully-assembled products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

1

Wiring Master/Expansion Module Wire Harness

Pin Numbers

Pin 1 2 3 4 5 6

Master VBATT Common CAN High CAN Low Common LIN

Master = Black Expansion = Gray

The interconnection between master module and controller uses a simple four-wire harness. Addressing of the master can be done by software or via address claim process. Interconnect wiring between master-expansion as well as expansionexpansion uses a three-wire harness.

1

Mating Connector Information ● Mating connector: Deutsch plug DT06-6S ● Wedge lock: W6S ● Socket contact: 0462-201-16141 (1.0–0.5 mm2 [16–20 AWG] ● Hole plug: 0413-217-1605

1 1 1 1 1 1

Expansion VBATT Common LIN LIN Common VBATT

1 1 1

Technical Data and Specifications

1

E33 eSM Specifications

1

Description

Specification

Operating temperature

–40° to 85°C

Storage temperature

–40° to 95°C

Operating voltage

9–32 Vdc

Environmental sealing

IP68

Mechanical shock

30g for 11 ms

Mechanical vibration

MIL-STD-202F/201A 2.0g random

1 1 1 1

Immunity to SAE J1455 and J1113 power disturbances

1

Communication Master

SAE J1939 CAN 2.0b

Expansion

LIN 2.0

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T1-13

1.4 1 1 1 1 1 1

Electronic Products E33 eSM—Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Standard Cut-Out

Serviceability

The modules are easily mounted with plastic retention clips. Modules are mounted in a single, space-saving cutout reducing assembly time and accommodating up to three switches in a compact design.

By modifying the standard cut-out to include the optional front panel removable slots shown below, the modules are easily serviceable from the front of the panel without further disassembly.

1

Standard Cut-Out

1

4X 0.13 (3.3)

1 1 1 1

Optional Panel Opening Features 2X 0.80 (20.4)

2.80 (71.1)

60º 4X

2X 1.83 (46.4)

2X 0.17 (4.3) 2X 0.50 (1.3)

1.45 (36.8) Optional Keying Feature

Recommended Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.04–0.16 (1.0–4.0)

4X 0.17 (4.3)

1 1

Due to the E33’s design allowing for late-point definition on assembly, both the actuator and circuit profile are serviceable as individual components.

2X 1.70 (43.2)

Optional Front Removal Slots 4X

E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units 0.65 (16.4)

1

2.91 (74.0)

1 1

1.44 1.70 (36.5) (43.2)

1.87 (47.4)

1 1 1 1

1.75 (44.4)

1

1.12 (28.4) Max.

1 1

1.73 Depth with (44.0) Mating Connector

E33 eSM Sealed Multiplexed Rocker Switch Units (Palm Guard Version)

1 0.83 (21.1)

1 1

1.89 (48.1)

1 1 1

Contact your Eaton sales engineer for availability.

V11-T1-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.5

Electronic Products eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

Contents

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1

Description eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Description

Application Description

Features

With a focus on communications, convenience and safety, Eaton Corporation is pleased to introduce eVU.

Typical applications for information display include:

Communication and Networking

Designed for Easy Installation

1

eVU displays can interface with smart engines, controllers and equipment software via established J1939 and J1708 communication protocols.

Some advancements in technology create installation obstacles. That isn’t the case with eVU. The displays fit into the same cutouts as standard Eaton NGR rocker switches, 0.866 x 1.732 in (22.00 x 44.00 mm), making installation easy. The simplified architecture not only saves dash space, it also saves costs.

1

● ●

Rugged dashpanel displays simplify the viewing, selecting and inputting of key equipment/trip data. Working in sync with existing controllers and networks, the displays provide the driver with valuable feedback on vehicle status and performance. eVU displays offer a great deal of flexibility which can include: ● Internal warning/ alert buzzer ● Backlighted legend displays ● Sunlight readable LCD characters ● Internal power supply ● Analog or discrete switch inputs ● Up to 2.5 digit character display ● 8-segment bar graph ● Individual LED control So, what’s the e for? Easy, electronic and evolutionary. eVU fills the gap (literally) between on-board systems and displays, ideal for applicationspecific functions.

● ● ● ● ● ●

Temperature Pressure Speed Distance Capacity Transmission Warnings/alarms System information

Safety eVU displays are easier to access than typical touch screens or soft-key applications. Keeping the dashboard displays within the driver’s line of vision helps keep the driver and everyone else on the road safe. Additionally, the eVU displays are designed to meet SAE-1455 specification. What Do You Want to View? There are many types of eVU displays and they can be customized with various colors, resolutions and character configurations. Choose the functionality you want with the flexibility you need.

In addition, eVU displays can receive input from analog transducers and sub-systems. Analog inputs can be either 0–20 mA or 0–10V. Additional input options exist for up to six logic states.

1 1 1 1 1 1

Product Selection Note: All products are custom ordered. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

1 1 1

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in mm [in]

Mounting Instructions

1

Product is designed to mount in panels between 1 to 4 mm (0.039 to 0.157 in) thick.

1

eVu—Electronic Vehicle Display

1

26.0 [1.02]

2.7 [0.11] 44.04 [1.734]

50.0 [1.97]

22.02 [0.867]

50.0 [1.97]

1 1 1 1

Panel Opening 21.5 [0.85]

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1 V11-T1-15

Rockers NGR

2.1

Introduction Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.2

SVR

2.4

2.6

2.7

2.10

2.12

V11-T2-54 V11-T2-55

V11-T2-62 V11-T2-63

V11-T2-65 V11-T2-66

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

V11-T2-69 V11-T2-70

V11-T2-72 V11-T2-73 V11-T2-74

2 2 2 2 2

V11-T2-76

V11-T2-78 V11-T2-79

Symbol Library NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Only Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2

V11-T2-68

Technical Data Rocker, Toggle and Pushbuttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Switch Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.14

V11-T2-48

Accessories Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.13

V11-T2-47

8064/8065 ESPORT Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

ESPORT

V11-T2-44

X Series Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.11

V11-T2-43

8004/8005—Euro Full Size Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

EURO SR

V11-T2-42

8006/8007—EURO SR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.9

V11-T2-41

Rockette Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.8

V11-T2-34

1600/2600 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Rockette

V11-T2-32

1500/2500 Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2

Dual Motion Safety Switch Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.5

V11-T2-8 V11-T2-10

SVR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2

NGR Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2.3

V11-T2-3

V11-T2-80 V11-T2-85 V11-T2-95

V11-T2-1

2 2 2 2 2 2

2.1 2

Rockers Introduction

Rocker Switch Products

Contents Description

2

Rocker Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Rocker Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dual Motion Safety Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated . . . . . . . . . . 8006/8007—EURO SR. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8004/8005—Euro Full Size . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8064/8065—ESPORT. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-3 V11-T2-8 V11-T2-32 V11-T2-41 V11-T2-43 V11-T2-47 V11-T2-54 V11-T2-62 V11-T2-65 V11-T2-68 V11-T2-72 V11-T2-76 V11-T2-78 V11-T2-80

Rockers Introduction

2.1

Rocker Selection Guide See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated

2

NGR

SVR

2 2 2 2 2 2

Features Ratings

15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac; 15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating)

12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc

2

Certifications

RoHS, UL® Approvable

RoHS, UL Approvable

2

Panel Opening

Rectangular

Octagonal

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.30 mm) 1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm) 1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm)

✔ — ✔

✔ ✔ ✔

— ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ ✔ ✔ — —

2

✔ ✔

✔ ✔

2

✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ —

✔ — — —

✔ — — —

— — ✔ ✔ — ✔ — — — ✔ ✔

— — — — — — — — — ✔ ✔

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-10

Page V11-T2-34

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-16

Page V11-T2-36

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-17

Page V11-T2-37

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-30

Page V11-T2-38

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-80

Page V11-T2-80

Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width

2 2

Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel

2 2

Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label

2 2

Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four

2 2

Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs

2 2

Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-3

2.1 2 2

Rockers Introduction

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued Dual Motion Safety Switch

1500/2500

Ratings

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac

Certifications

UL, CSA®, RoHS

UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS

Panel Opening

Octagonal

Rectangular

1.450 in (36.80 mm); 1.190 in (30.20 mm) 0.830 in (21.10 mm); 0.680 in (17.20 mm) N/A

1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm) 0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm) 0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)

— — —

— — —

— ✔ ✔ — — —

— ✔ ✔ — — —

— ✔

— ✔

✔ — —

✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ — —

— — — — — — — — — — —

✔ ✔ — — ✔ — — ✔ ✔ — —

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-42

Page V11-T2-44

Technical Data



Page V11-T2-46

Circuit Diagrams



Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-42

Page V11-T2-46

Icon/Legend Symbols Library



Page V11-T2-53

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Features

Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED

2 V11-T2-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Introduction

2.1

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued 1600/2600

2

Rockette

2 2 2 2 2 2

Features Ratings

Up to 22A at 125 Vac, 16A at 250 Vac

Up to 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac

Certifications

UL, CSA, ENEC, RoHS

UL, CSA, RoHS

Panel Opening

Rectangular

Octagonal

1.075 in (27.30 ± 0.10 mm) 0.483 in (12.27 ± 0.07 mm) 0.876 in (22.25 ± 0.10 mm)

1.450 in (36.83 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm) 0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) 0.830 in (21.80 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)

— — —

✔ — —

— ✔ ✔ — — —

— ✔ — — — —

— ✔

— ✔

✔ ✔ —

— ✔ ✔

✔ ✔ — —

✔ ✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ — — ✔ — — — — — —

— — ✔ — — ✔ ✔ — — — —

Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width

2 2 2 2

Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel

2

Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label

2 2 2

Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print

2 2

Poles Single Double Four

2 2

Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs

2 2

Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-48

Page V11-T2-55

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-52

Page V11-T2-58

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-78

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-52

Page V11-T2-58

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-53



2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-5

2.1 2 2

Rockers Introduction

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details. Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued 8006/8007

8004/8005

Ratings

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc

Certifications

UL(CUR), RoHS

UL(CUR), RoHS

Panel Opening

Octagonal

Rectangular

1.450 in (36.85 mm); 1.190 in (30.23 mm) 0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm) 0.830 in (21.08 mm); 0.680 in (17.27 mm)

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

✔ — —

✔ — —

— ✔ ✔ ✔ — —

— ✔ — ✔ — ✔

— ✔

— ✔

✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ ✔ —

— — ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔ ✔ — —

— — ✔ ✔ — ✔ — ✔ ✔ — —

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-63

Page V11-T2-66

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-64

Page V11-T2-67

2

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-78

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-64

Page V11-T2-67

2

Icon/Legend Symbols Library





2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Features

Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print Poles Single Double Four Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED

2 V11-T2-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Introduction

2.1

See Technical Data and Dimensions for more details.

2

Rocker Switches—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated, continued X Series

2

8064/8065

2 2 2 2 Features Ratings

16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V Recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc

10A at 250 Vac, 15A at 125 Vac, 3/4 hp at 250 Vac, recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc

Certifications

UL(CUR); RoHS, T85

UL(CUR); RoHS

2 2

Rectangular

Rectangular

2

1.46 in (37.00 ± 0.1 mm) 0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm) 0.83 in (21.20 ± 0.1 mm)

1.734 in (44.04 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm) 0.867 in (22.02 ± 0.13 mm)

2

✔ — —

— — —

— ✔ — — — —

— ✔ ✔ — — ✔

✔ —

— ✔

✔ ✔ —

✔ ✔ —

2

✔ ✔ ✔ —

✔ — — —

2

— — — — — — — — — ✔ ✔ ✔ ✔

— — — — — — — — — ✔ ✔ — —

Catalog Number Selection

Page V11-T2-69

Page V11-T2-73

Technical Data

Page V11-T2-70

Page V11-T2-74

Circuit Diagrams

Page V11-T2-70 (Light Diagrams)

Page V11-T2-78

Dimensions

Page V11-T2-71

Page V11-T2-75

Icon/Legend Symbols Library

Page V11-T2-70

Page V11-T2-74

Panel Opening Single- and two-pole length Single-pole width Two-pole width

2

Seal Top (internal) Bottom (internal) Panel

2 2

Actuator Rocker without bezel Rocker with bezel Paddle Snap-in lens Locking Label

2 2 2

Decorative Laser-etch Pad-print

2

Poles Single Double Four

2

Termination Spade Solder Screw Weld lugs

2

Illumination Incandescent 6 Vdc Incandescent 12 Vdc Incandescent 14 Vdc Incandescent 18 Vdc Incandescent 24 Vdc Incandescent 28 Vdc Neon 110V Neon 125V Neon 250V 14V LED 28V LED 125V LED 277V LED

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-7

2.2 2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Contents

NGR Rocker Switches

Description

2

Page

NGR Rocker Switches Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Rocker Buttons/Actuators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lens Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps . NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Standard Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2 2

V11-T2-10 V11-T2-11 V11-T2-13 V11-T2-14 V11-T2-15 V11-T2-16 V11-T2-17 V11-T2-30

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Features

Eaton presents its NGR Rocker Switches. This fieldproven line of full-sized rocker switches, initially developed for the heavy truck industry, is now found in a variety of vehicle-related applications.

Sealing Standard switch provides splash and dust resistance to IP42. The sealed version is sealed to IP67 when supplied with panel seal. ●

Rocker The standard actuator for the NGR is a clean, Europeanstyled, two-face rocker made of high-quality thermoplastic material. The rocker is replaceable and snaps on and off the switch. Both the rocker and the bezel are supplied with an aesthetically pleasing matte finish. Different colors are also available, but black is standard. Rockers can be ordered separately. ●

The NGR offers both European styling and ergonomic design while still providing the solid durability that you have come to expect from Eaton switches. Illuminated and nonilluminated versions with either incandescent bulbs or LEDs are available in either dependent or independent circuits and in a variety of popular switching circuits.

Lighting Each switch is capable of accommodating two incandescent light bulbs or LEDs for lighting purposes. A lamp or LED can be located at either end of the switch and oriented to be circuit dependent or independent. The incandescent bulbs are front replaceable. Two lamp or LED voltages, 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc, are standard. For additional voltages or colors, consult your local Eaton Sales Representative. ●

The NGR also offers a variety of rocker buttons and indicators with laser-etched or pad-printed icons, insertable lenses and adhesive-backed labels.

2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ●





Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative RoHS Compliant 1

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Options ●

Circuits ● 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT ● Maintained and momentary action





● ●





● ● ●



● ●



Common lamp ground jumper for dual lamp units Multiple LEDs for daylight readability Additional colors of rockers, mounting bezels and lenses are available Special circuits Special ratings Pad-printed legends on lens, rocker and bezel Special lamps and lamp voltages Dry circuit capabilities Custom back-lit legends available Reversing jumpers (internal)

● ●

● ●

Gang mounting system, see Page V11-T2-77 Locking rocker with locking feature in UP and/or DOWN positions Indicators with laseretched or insertable lenses, or adhesive labels IP67 rated sealed switch Polarized lock-on connectors, see Page V11-T2-76 ● 28-5637-2 for Packard terminals ● 28-5940 for AMP terminals Panel plug 17-21543 Replacement bulb catalog number ● 14V: 28-5901 ● 28V: 28-5909

For more information on additional options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

2.2

Legends

Flexible Ordering System

Two legend areas are provided on the ends of each rocker of sufficient size to accommodate two lines consisting of four Helvetica Narrow 12-point characters. Legends may be nonilluminated or illuminated. The NGR offers three styles of illuminated legends.

You can order assembled switches or the switch base and actuator separately. Use the final code in the switch base catalog number, Page V11-T2-10, to denote assembly instructions.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Single-piece back-lit—Backlighting is a high-quality automotive/truck industry technique. The legend can appear daylight white or dead-front when nonilluminated but, depending on the back-lit color chosen, will change color when illuminated. Examples of standard back-lit legends are found on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Snap-in lenses—This rocker will have either one or two snap-in lenses in the legend areas. Legends are typically pad-printed on the lens in black or white. Snap-in lenses are available in six standard colors and can be ordered separately.

2 2 2 2

Label rocker—This rocker has a one-piece adhesivebacked label inserted into a recessed area on the face of the button. Legends can be done in several colors and be illuminated or non-illuminated. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for suggested sources.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-9

2.2 2

Rocker and Paddle Frame

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Full Palm Guard

Switch Base

Panel Seal and Internal Seal

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

To order rocker and switch base assembled, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13. To order indicator caps, see Page V11-T2-15. For a complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.

Catalog Number Selection How To Order—Switch Base To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2

Example: Switch Series (Unsealed) NGR = Switch base

Circuit 1 1501 = Circuit See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29.

2 2

NGR

Frame Style 1 = Rocker and paddle frame 2 = Palm guard (top) 3 = Palm guard (bottom) 4 = Full palm guard (top/bottom) S = Panel seal and internal seal G = Locking rocker 2 D = Locking rocker 3 F = Locking rocker 4 T = Internal seal

1501 Frame Color

B = Black

Switch Contact Plating 5 N = Standard T = High rated G = Gold

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4

B N

A

0

“A” Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6 B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6 C = 28V LED/red 8 D = 28V LED/green 8 E = 28V LED/amber 8 R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red 7 L = 28V LED/green 7 T = 28V LED/amber 7 W = 28V LED/white 7 X = 28V LED/blue 7 H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

N “B” Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear 6 B = 24 Vdc incand./clear 6 C = 28V LED/red 8 D = 28V LED/green 8 E = 28V LED/amber 8 R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red 7 L = 28V LED/green 7 T = 28V LED/amber 7 W = 28V LED/white 7 X = 28V LED/blue 7 H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Notes 1 Circuits show lighting options available. See Pages V11-T2-17 to V11-T2-29. 2 Locks in DOWN position. 3 Locks in UP and DOWN positions. 4 Locks in UP position. 5 Switch contact construction plating— N = Standard: Recommended for use on loads up to 12 amps at 14 Vdc. T = High Rated: Recommended for use on loads greater than 12 amps at 14 Vdc. G = Gold: Recommended for use on dry circuit/low level switching. 6 Replaceable. 7 Replaceable/wedge base LED. 8 PCB version LED.

2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rocker Assembled N = No

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Face Rocker, No Lens

Two-Face Rocker, Snap-In Lens

Rocker Buttons/Actuators

Decorative Decorative Rocker, Paddle, Back-Lit Back-Lit

Locking Rocker

2

Label Rocker

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Rocker Buttons/Actuators

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate button type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Rocker Button Type 1 = Two-face, no lens rocker 2 = Two-face, snap-in lens rocker 3 = Decorative rocker, back-lit 4 = Decorative paddle, back-lit 5 = Locking rocker 6 = Label rocker

Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = “A” only B = “B” only C = “A” and “B” D = No icon/lens/hole

3

C

AF

A 1

B

AE

C

4

A 3

Icon “A” Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “B” Code AE = Lock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “A” Orientation A = Standard orientation B = 90° clockwise C = 180° clockwise D = 270° clockwise 0 = No icon; no orientation

Icon “B” Orientation A = Standard orientation B = 90° clockwise C = 180° clockwise D = 270° clockwise 0 = No icon; no orientation

Icon “A” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Indicator Stripe Location 1 = “A” Position 2 = “B” Position 3 = “A” and “B” Positions 0 = No stripe

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-11

2.2 2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Icon Location Examples

Icon Orientation Examples

Location A

Location C

Orientation A

Orientation C

Rocker with Icon in “A” Position (Code A)

Rocker with Icon in “C” Position (Code C)

Rocker with Standard Orientation (Code A)

Rocker with Icon at 180° Clockwise (Code C)

Location B

Orientation B

Orientation D

Rocker with Icon in “B” Position (Code B)

Rocker with Icon at 90° Clockwise (Code B)

Rocker with Icon at 270° Clockwise (Code D)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Translucent Lens

Transparent Lens

2.2

Lens Selection

2

For NGR Rocker Type “2” and Indicator Type “2CAP” only.

2 2 2 2 2 Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Translucent Lenses 12 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Lens Color Red Green Amber Blue White 4

Base Catalog Number 28-5863-2 28-5863 28-5863-3 28-5863-9 28-5863-8

28-5863-2

AF

2

A

2

Orientation Style Code A = Standard orientation B = Rotated 90° clockwise C = Inverted 180° D = Rotated 270° clockwise

Icon Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

How To Order—Transparent Lenses 12 To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example: Lens Color Red Green Amber Blue Clear 4

Base Catalog Number 28-5863-5 28-5863-4 28-5863-6 28-5863-10 28-5863-7

28-5863-5

AF

Icon Code AF = Unlock See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

A

2 2 2

Orientation Style Code A = Standard orientation B = Rotated 90° clockwise C = Inverted 180° D = Rotated 270° clockwise

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 When ordering a lens with an icon for the code B (bottom) position, specify code C orientation. 2 Standard lens type. 3 Non-standard lens type. 4 Standard pad print for white and clear lens is black.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 2 V11-T2-13

2.2 2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

NGR Complete Indicators and Indicator Caps

Complete Indicator and Indicator Cap Assembled

To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection How To Order—Complete Indicator To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Example: Indicator Type 2N = Two-face, snap-in lens 3N = Laser-etched 6N = Label

2N C

AA R

Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = “A” icon only B = “B” icon only C = “A” and “B” icons D = No icon/lens/hole

1

B

AB

Icon “A” Code AA = Horn See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Lamp/LED Type and Color A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 28 Vdc incand./clear 0 = No lamp/LED R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

A 0

A Icon “B” Code AB = Battery See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Lamp/LED Type and Color A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 28 Vdc incand./clear 0 = No lamp/LED R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Icon “A” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red B = Green C = Amber E = Blue F = White G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only.

2 2 V11-T2-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Indicator Base

2.2

NGR Indicator Base and Indicator Caps

Indicator Cap

2

To order rocker buttons, see Page V11-T2-11. To order lenses, see Page V11-T2-13. To order complete indicator, see Page V11-T2-14.

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Indicator Base To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base prefix and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

NGRIND A

“A” Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 24 Vdc incand./clear R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber X = 28V LED/blue H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

Switch Series (Unsealed) NGRIND = Indicator base

0

2

N

“B” Lamp Type and Color 0 = No lamp A = 14 Vdc incand./clear B = 24 Vdc incand./clear R = 14V LED/red G = 14V LED/green Y = 14V LED/amber K = 28V LED/red L = 28V LED/green T = 28V LED/amber X = 28V LED/blue H = 14V LED/high intensity red J = 14V LED/high intensity green P = 14V LED/high intensity amber M = 14V LED/high intensity blue

2

Rocker Assembled

2

N = No

2 2 2 2 2 2

How To Order—Indicator Cap To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate indicator type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Indicator Type 2CAP = Two-face, snap-in lens 3CAP = Decorative/ laser-etched 6CAP = Label

2

2CAP

Icon/Lens/Hole Location A = “A” icon only B = “B” icon only C = “A” and “B” icons D = No icon/lens/hole

C

AB 1 B Icon “A” Code AB = Battery See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

AH

0

A

2 2

Icon “B” Code AH = Fuel See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-94.

Icon “A” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “B” Color 0 = No icon; no color 1 = Daylight white 1 2 = Deadfront 1 3 = White 2 4 = Black 2 5 = Lens hole (no lens)

Icon “A” Lighted Color or Lens Color E = Blue A = Red F = White B = Green G = Clear C = Amber 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

Icon “B” Lighted Color or Lens Color A = Red E = Blue B = Green F = White C = Amber G = Clear 0 = Non-lighted or no lens

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Decorative rocker only. 2 Two-face rocker only.

2 2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-15

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

NGR Rocker Switches

2 2 2 2

Description Ratings

1

Specification 15A at 125 Vac, 10A at 250 Vac 15A at 28 Vdc (14 Vdc rating) Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications

Contact material— Standard construction

Movable—copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button Stationary—silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact face button

Mechanical life

250,000 operations, minimum

2

Electrical life

200,000 operations, minimum

Terminal type

Standard 0.25 in (6.35 mm) spade, silver-plated copper alloy

2

Base material

High-grade thermoplastic molding material

Dielectric

1000V rms, minimum

2

Mounting means

Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

2

Mounting hole

Rectangular panel cutout 1.734 x 0.867 in (44 x 22 mm)

Panel thickness

0.040 to 0.156 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) 2 3

2 2 2 2

IP rating

Standard IP42; sealed option IP67

Operating temperature range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Notes 1 For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 2 Best results obtained between 0.060 and 0.118 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm). 3 On sealed versions, recommended panel thickness between 0.079 and 0.118 in (2.0 and 3.0 mm).

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-16

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Standard Circuit Diagrams Single-Pole

2

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1001

OFF 9

UP Position

ON

2001 9

4

1 6 2B

7

8

9

10

1501



OFF 3

8

9

10

1502



OFF

NONE



5B



OFF 9

NONE

2B

1504



OFF 9

NONE

ON

5B

7

8

9

10

1505



OFF

2B

7

8

9

10

1506



OFF

NONE

2B

7

1507



NONE

9

10

9



1508



NONE

2B

10

9

— 8



2B-3

2 2 2 2 2

NONE

ON





2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON





2B-3 5B-6

2

OFF

NONE

ON

2





2B-3 5B-6

2

OFF

NONE

ON

2





2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON





2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON





2B-3-9-1 5B-6

OFF

NONE

ON





2B-3 5B-6

2 2 2

2

10

5B

2

OFF

4

1 6 2B

7

2B-3-9 5B-6

8

3

5B

5B

2508

4

1 6



10

2B-3-9-10

ON



4

1 6

7

OFF 9

5B

2507

8

ON

8

3

5B

7

NONE

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6

2B

8

2506

10

9

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

OFF

2 2

4

1 6

7

OFF

3

10

2B

8

2B

9

2505

3



5B

5B 8

2B-3-9

ON

2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6

7

4

1 6

3

10

3



5B

2B

9

2504

2B-3

ON

5B 8

4

1 6

3

NONE



10

3





4

1 6

7

4

ON

8

2B-3

10 1 6

5B

2503

8

NONE

4

1 6

9



5B

2B

10

3

7

3

9

2502

10

2B

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

OFF

4

1 6

7

1503

3

10

2B

8

2B

9

2501

3

7

3

8

2B-3-9

ON

5B

7

4

1 6 2B

ON

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

3



5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6 2B

NONE

CENTER Position

10 3



5B

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

7

NONE

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

8

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-17

2.2 2 2 2 2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

1002

OFF 9

8

9

10

OFF 3

8

9

10

1522

OFF

8

9

10

1523

OFF

2

1524

2

2

OFF

8

9

10

OFF

MOM. ON



NONE



7

8

9

10

OFF

2

3

8

9

10

2523



NONE

8

9

10

2524



NONE

8

9

10

2525

8



5B

7

8

9

10

2526

5B

7

8

9

10

2528

5B 8

2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-18

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON





2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6 2B

7

2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6 2B

2B-3



4

1 6 2B

3



5B

5B

7

2B-3-10

MOM. ON



4

1 6 2B

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6 2B

7

NONE

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

NONE

4

1 6 2B

3



5B

1528

2

NONE

2B-3-10

4

1 6 2B

10

3



5B

7

3

9

4

1 6

1526

2



10

2B

8

2522

8

9

2

MOM. ON

5B

7

3



5B

1525

2

NONE

OFF

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6

3

10

2B-3-9

10

7

2 2

OFF 9

2B

9

2521

8

3

8

3



5B

7

2



5B

7

4

1 6 2B

MOM. ON

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

3



5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6 2B

NONE

CENTER Position

10

3



5B

7

3



4

1 6 2B

2 2

2002 3

7

2 2

MOM. ON

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9



5B

1521

2

NONE

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10 3

2 2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In …

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) ON

ON

2003

2B-1 8

9

10

1541

ON

5B 8

9

10

1542

ON

8

9

10

1543

ON

NONE

2B-3-9

ON



NONE

2B

7

1544



ON

2B-1



2B-3

ON

NONE

ON

9

2544

7

2545

10

9

4

1 6

2B-1

5B 8

9

10

1546

ON

ON

7

8

9

10

1547

ON



NONE

2B

10



1548 9

7

8

9

10

2547

2B-3-9

NONE

ON

10

2548 9

2B-1 8

5B 8



ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2

ON

NONE

ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

2

ON

NONE

ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-1-10 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

2B-3

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

4

1 6 2B

7

2

2

10 3

5B

NONE

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6

5B

7

ON

ON

4

1 6 2B

8

2B

9

2546

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

2

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B

NONE

2B-3-9

4

1 6

3



2B-3 5B-6

10 3

7

2B

8

3

1545

5B

7

NONE



4

1 6 2B

8

3

10

2B

5B

7

2B

9

2543

10

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3

ON

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6

9

9

2B

10

2B

8

3

9

2542

3

2B-1

5B

5B 8

2B-3-10

ON

ON

4

1 6

7

4

1 6 2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2541

4

1 6 2B



5B 8

3

2B-1

7

3

ON

2B 7

4

1 6 2B

NONE

2B-3

2

NONE

4

1 6

2

ON

10

3



UP Position

4

5B

7

CENTER Position

10 3

8

2B

9

4

1 6

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

7

NONE

UP Position

1 6

9

CENTER Position

5B

1003

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

5B 8

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-19

2.2 2 2 2 2

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In …

1004

ON 9

2 2

8

9

10

ON 3

8

9

10

1562

ON

8

9

10

1563

ON

2

10

ON

8

9

10

ON

7

8

9

10

ON 3

2

8

9

10

1567

ON 3

2 2

8

9

10

1568

ON 3

7

2

OFF

2B-3-10

ON



OFF



OFF

8

9

10

2563



OFF



OFF

8

9

10

2564



OFF

8

9

10

2565 1 6 2B

8



8

9

10

2566 1 6 2B

8

9

10

2567 1 6 2B

8

9

10

2568 1 6 2B

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1-10 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

4 5B 8

2 2 V11-T2-20

ON

4 5B

7

7

2B-3 5B-6

4 5B

7

2B-3



4 5B

7

3

2B-1

5B

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6 2B

2B-3-10

ON

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

ON

4

1 6 2B

2B-3

ON

5B

7

2B-3

ON

OFF

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6 2B

10

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2

9

2562

4

1 6 2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

2



5B

7

4

1 6 2B

ON

ON

4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1

5B

1566

2

OFF

2B-3-9

4

1 6 2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2561

4

1 6

1565

2

2

9

1564

2 2

8

2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3



5B

7

4

1 6 2B

ON

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6 2B

OFF

CENTER Position

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3



4

1 6 2B

2

2004 3

7

2

ON

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9

2B-1

5B

1561

2

OFF

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10 3

2

2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1005

MOM. ON 9

UP Position

MOM. ON

2005

2B-1

7

8

9

10

1581

MOM. ON 3

5B 8

9

10

1582

MOM. ON

8

9

10

1583

MOM. ON

OFF

2B-3-9

MOM. ON



OFF

1584 9



9

2B-3

OFF

MOM. ON



OFF

2584

5B 8

9

10

1586

MOM. ON

2585

OFF

MOM. ON

7

8

9

10

1587

MOM. ON



OFF

2B

9

10

2586



1588

7

8

9

10

2B-3-9

OFF

MOM. ON

10

8

9

2B-1 8



2B-3

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

2

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1-10 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

5B 8

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

4

1 6 2B

7

MOM. ON

10 3

5B

5B

2588

4

1 6

OFF

4

1 6 2B

7

MOM. ON 9

5B

2587

8

MOM. ON

4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2B

8

4

1 6

5B

7

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

2

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B-3 5B-6

10

2B-3-9

4

1 6

5B 8

3





10

9

2B-1

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6 2B

10

7

5B 8

2B-3

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6

3

10

7

MOM. ON

2B

9

9

2B-1

1585

3

8

2583

8

2B

7

3

5B

7

5B

2

OFF

4

1 6 2B

10

3

10

4

1 6

2B

9

2582

7

MOM. ON

3

8

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

5B

7

2

MOM. ON

4

1 6 2B

8

2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2581

4

1 6 2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3



5B

2B 7

4

1 6 2B

MOM. ON

UP Position

4

1 6

3

2B-1

7

3

OFF

2B-3

4

1 6 2B



CENTER Position

10 3

5B

2B

9

4

1 6

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

7

CENTER Position

OFF

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-21

2.2 2 2 2 2

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In …

1006

ON 9

2 2

8

9

10

ON 3

8

9

10

1602

ON

8

9

10

1603

ON

2

10

ON

8

9

10

ON

7

8

9

10

ON 3

2

8

9

10

1607

ON 3

2 2

8

9

10

1608

ON 3

7

2

OFF

2B-3-10

MOM. ON



OFF



OFF

8

9

10

2603



OFF



OFF

8

9

10

2604



OFF

8

9

10

2605

8



5B

7

8

9

10

2606

5B

7

8

9

10

2607

5B

7

8

9

10

2608

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1-10 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6 2B

5B 8

2 2 V11-T2-22

ON

4

1 6 2B

7

2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6 2B

2B-3



4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1

5B

5B

7

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6 2B

2B-3-10

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3-9

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

4

1 6 2B

2B-3

MOM. ON

5B

7

2B-3

MOM. ON

OFF

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6 2B

10

3

2B-1-10

5B

7

2

9

2602

4

1 6 2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

2



5B

7

4

1 6 2B

MOM. ON

ON

4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1

5B

1606

2

OFF

2B-3-9

4

1 6 2B

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

9

2601

4

1 6

1605

2

2

9

1604

2 2

8

2B

8

3

2B-1

5B

7

3



5B

7

4

1 6 2B

MOM. ON

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

3

2B-1

5B

7

3

2B-3

4

1 6 2B

OFF

CENTER Position

10

3

2B-1

5B

7

3



4

1 6 2B

2

2006 3

7

2

MOM. ON

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9

2B-1

5B

1601

2

OFF

UP Position

4

1 6 2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10 3

2

2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 1007

ON 9

CENTER Position

NONE

UP Position

MOM ON

1 6

2007 9

2B-1



2B-3

2B

8

ON 9

NONE

MOM ON

1

9

5B



2B-3-9

1622

ON

NONE

MOM ON

1 6

3

5B

7



2B-3-10

2B

8

ON 9

NONE

MOM ON

2623 9 3

2B-1

5B

2B-3

NONE

MOM ON

9

2B

2B-1

5B



2B-3

2B

8

ON 9

NONE

MOM ON

1 6

2B



2B-3-9

1626

ON

NONE

MOM ON

3

1 6

2B 7

3

2B-1



2B-3-10

1627

ON

NONE

MOM ON

8

1

6

2B

3

4

2B-1-10

5B

7



2B-3-9

8

1628 9

NONE

MOM ON

2B

1 6

2B-1



ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

2

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-1-10 5B-4



2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

NONE

MOM ON

2B-3 7

2B

8

2B-1 5B-4



2B-3 5B-6

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

4 5B

2

2

10 1 6

3

8

8

2628

4 5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

4 5B

9

10 3

1 6

2B

7

ON



10

9 3

7

5B

2627

9

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6

2B

7

8

2

10

9

4 5B

8

2626

10

MOM ON

4 5B

2B

7

8

NONE

10 1 6

3

2B-1

9

8

9

4 5B

7

5B

2625

10 3

ON

4

7

1625

2

10 1 6

3

4

6

8

2624

10 1

2B-3 5B-6

4 5B

7

ON 3

1 6

2B

8

1624 9





10

4

6

1

7

7

8

10

2B

2B-1 5B-4

4 5B

7

1623 3

1 6

3

2B-1

MOM ON

10

9

4

2B

8

2622

10

9

5B

2

NONE

4

2B

7

8

1 6

2

ON

10 3

2B-1

2B

7

8

4

6

5B

2621

10

UP Position

4

7

1621 3

1 6

3

5B

CENTER Position

10

4

2B

7

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-23

2.2 2 2 2 2

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In …

3003

OFF 9 3

2

OFF

2

2

1 6

OFF 9 1 6

OFF 9 3

1 6

ON

2A-2B

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF 9 3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF 9 3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF 9 3

1 6

ON

5B

2A-2B

OFF 9 3

1 6

ON

ON

5A 8

2A-2B

5A 8

9

10

3567 1 6 2A 2B

5A 8

9

10

3568 1 6 2A 2B 7

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1-10 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

ON

ON

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

4 5A

5B 8

2 2 V11-T2-24

OFF

4

5B

7

2B-3

2B-3 5B-6

4

5B

7

3

2A-1

1 6 2A

2B

4

2A 5B

10

2B-3-9

10

2B

9

3566

5A 8

3548

5A 8

3

2A-1-10

2A-2B 5A-5B

4

5B

7

2B-3-10

ON

1 6 2A

4

2A 7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3565

5A 8

3547

5A 8

3

2A-1

2A-1 5A-4

4

5B

7

2B-3-9

ON

1 6 2A

4

2A 7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3564

5A 8

3546

5A 8

3

2A-1

ON

4

5B

7

2B-3

ON

1 6 2A

4

2A 7

10

2B

10

2B

9

3563

5A 8

3545

5A 8

3

2A-1

ON

4

5B

7

2B-3

ON

1 6 2A

2B

4

2A 7

10

2B-3-10

10

2B

9

3562

5A 8

3544

2

ON

5A 8

3

2A-1 5B

7

7

2A-2B

OFF

4

5B

7

4

2A

2

ON

10 3

2

ON

1 6 2A

2B

5A 8

3543

2B

10

3

2A-1 5B

9

4

2A 7

8

2B-3-9

8

OFF

2 2

5A

2A-2B

5A

3561

10 3

2

ON

UP Position

4

5B

7

3

2A-1 5B

2B

2

2B

4

9

2 2

1 6 2A

2B

3542

2

ON

1 6 2A

2B-3

CENTER Position

10 3

2A-2B

10 3

2

3004

5A 8

9

2

ON

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

4

3541

2

ON

UP Position

9

2A-1 5B

7

2

2

1 6 2A

7

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10

2B

2

2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 5001

ON 9

UP Position

OFF

1 6

5510

2B

9

4

2B-1

5B 8

9

10

5501

ON 3

1 6 2B

8

9

10

5502

ON

7

8

9

10

5503

ON

NONE



OFF



NONE

7



9

NONE



9

NONE

5514

8

9

10

5506

ON

NONE

7

8

9

10

5507

ON



NONE

2B

10



5508 9

7

8

9

10

5517



NONE

OFF

10

5518 9

2B-1 8

5B 8









ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-10 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-9 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-10 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

2B-1-9-10 5B-4





ON

NONE

OFF

5B 8

2B-1 5B-4





2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

4

1 6 2B

7

2B-1-9 5B-4

10 3

5B

OFF

4

1 6 2B

4

1 6

5B

7

ON

NONE

4

1 6 2B

8

2B

9

5516

3

2B-1-9-10

5B

7

3

8

4

1 6

5B

7



OFF

ON

2

2

10



OFF



4

1 6

3

2B-1-10

5B

2B



4

1 6

8

3

5B

5B

9

2B-1-9



10

5515

10

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6 2B

4

7

5B 8



OFF

OFF

4

1 6 2B

7

ON

3

10

9

2B-1

5505

2B

9

5513

8

3

8

3

5B

7

5B

7



OFF

NONE

4

1 6 2B

10

2B

10

4

1 6

1 6

9

7

ON

3

8

5512

8

5504

5B

2B 7



OFF

ON

4

1 6

3

2B-1

5B

2B

10

4

1 6

3

9

5511

3

2B-1-10

5B

2B



5B 8

4

1 6

3

OFF

2B 7

3

2B-1-9

5B

2B

NONE

UP Position

10



4

7

3



CENTER Position

4

1 6

3

7

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

7

CENTER Position

NONE

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-25

2.2 2 2 2 2

Circuit with Rocker In …

5002

MOM. ON 3

2 2

9

10

8

9

10

5522

8

9

10

5523

2

9

10

8

9

10

8

9

10

9

10

5528

2

7

OFF



NONE

OFF



NONE

OFF

1 6

5B

1 6

5B

5547 1 6

5B

7

2A-2B

2B-3

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3-9

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3-10

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1-10

2A-2B

2B-3-9

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1

2A-2B

2B-3

10 3

1 6

4

2A 2B

5B

5A 8

2 2 V11-T2-26

2A-1

5A 8

9

2

OFF

4

2A

7

ON

10

2B

2

ON

5A 8

5548

2

2B-3-10

4

2A

8

2A-2B

10

2B



2A-1

5A 8

5546

3



OFF

4

9

2B-1

ON

10

2B



ON

5A 8

2A



2B-3-9

4

5545

4 5B

5B

7

MOM. ON 1 6

1 6

2B

3

8

2B

NONE

2A-2B

10

2A



2A-1

5A 8

9

2B-1-10

5B

7

3



OFF

4

5544

4

1 6

5B

7

MOM. ON

2

OFF

3

5B

1 6

2B

9

2B-1-9

5526

2

NONE

ON

5A 8

2A



4

7

2B



ON

10

7

MOM. ON 1 6

5B

5543

3

7

3

OFF

2B-3

4

9

2B-1

5B

1 6

2B

4

1 6

2B

NONE

2A-2B

5A 8

2A



2A-1

10

7

MOM. ON

5525

2 2

8

5B

5542

3

5524

2



OFF

4

9

2B-1

5B

7

3

OFF

4

1 6

1 6

2B

7

MOM. ON

2B

NONE

ON

10

2A



ON

5A 8

5541

3

7

3



UP Position

4

9

2B-1-10

5B

2B

OFF

4

1 6

5B

7

MOM. ON

3

NONE

3

7

2B

2B

9

2B-1-9

5B

1 6 2A



4

1 6

3



CENTER Position

10

7

MOM. ON

2B

2

5003 3

8

3

2

OFF

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 9

2B-1

7

2

NONE

UP Position

4 5B

5521

2

2

1 6 2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10

9

2

2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Single-Pole

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 3001

ON 9

UP Position

ON

3002

2B

9

4

1 6

5B-4-2B-1

5B 8

9

10

3501

ON 3

1 6 2B

8

9

10

3502

ON 1 6

9

10

3503

ON 1 6

5B-4-2B-3-9

ON

5B-4-2B-3-10

ON

3504

ON 9

2B

5B-4-2B-3

ON

5B-4-2B-1

3505

ON 9

9

10

3506

ON 6

2B-3 5B-6 ON

5B-4-2B-3

9

10

3507

ON 1 6

ON

ON

5B-4-2B-3

2B

ON

ON

5B-4-2B-3

ON

5B-4-2B-3-9

8

ON 9

ON

ON

ON

1 6 2B

9

10 1 6 2B

5B-4-2B-3

2B-3 5B-6

7

8

9

10

3527 1 6 2B

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

2

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

2

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B-1-10 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

8

3528

OFF

1–ON

2–ON

2B

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

4 5B 8

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2

10 1 6

2

2

4 5B

7

7

OFF

4 5B

9

5B-4-2B-1 8

5B 8

3

5B

2

4

7

4

2B-3 5B-6

10 1 6

3526

2B-3-9 5B-6

10 3

8

3

5B-4-2B-1

3508

5B

2B

2B-3 5B-6

2B-3 5B-4

4

3525

2B-3 5B-6

2B-1 5B-4

10 1 6

7

4 5B

7

8

3524

2B-3 5B-6

2–ON

4 5B

7

3

5B-4-2B-1 8

2B

1 6 2B

4 5B

7

3

10

9

5B-4-2B-1 8

1

9

3

5B

2B

8

4

7

3

7

2

1–ON

4 5B

3523

10

2B

1 6

3

5B

1 6

10

9

8

3

9

2B

10

2B

8

3522

2B-3-10 5B-6 ON

5B

2

OFF

4

7

4

7

1 6

3

5B-4-2B-1 8

1 6

10

4 5B

7

3

9

3521

2B-3-9 5B-6 ON

5B 8

3

5B-4-2B-1 8

2B

2B 7

4 5B

7

3

ON

UP Position

4

1 6

3

5B-4-2B-1

5B

2B

ON

2B-3 5B-6

4

7

3

5B-4-2B-3

CENTER Position

10 3

7

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

10 3

7

CENTER Position

ON

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-27

2.2 2 2 2 2

Circuit with Rocker In …

3005

MOM. ON 9

2

9

10

2

7

8

9

10

7

8

9

10

3583

2B

9

10

3584

8

9

10

8

9

10

3586

8

9

10

3587 3

2 2

1 6 2B

9

10

3588 1 6 2B 7

2

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

1 6 2B

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3-10 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3-9 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3-10 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1-10 5B-4

2B-1-10 5B-6

2B-3-9 5B-6

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

8

9

10

4502 1 6 2B

8

9

10

4503 1 6 2B

8

2B-1 5B-6

2B-3 5B-6

8

9

10

4504 1 6 2B

8

9

10

4505 1 6 2B

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1-10 5B-4

2B-1-10 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

2B-1 5B-4

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

4 5B

7

8

9

10

4506 1 6 2B

4 5B

7

8

9

10

4507 1 6 2B

4 5B

7

8

9

10

4508 1 6 2B

4 5B 8

2 2 V11-T2-28

2B-1 5B-4

4 5B

7

7

MOM. ON

4 5B

7

3

2B-1 5B-4

ON

4 5B

7

4 5B

NONE

4 5B

7

3

8

3

2B-3-9 5B-6

4 5B

7

2

2B-1 5B-6

3

5B

7

2

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6 2B

10

3

5B

7

3

9

4501

4

1 6 2B

MOM. ON

8

3

5B

7

3

ON

UP Position

4 5B

7

4

1 6

3585

2 2

8

2B

MOM. ON

1 6 2B

3

5B

7

3

2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6

3

2B-1 5B-6

CENTER Position

10

3

5B

2B

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6

3

2

9

3

5B

3582

2

4001

4

1 6 2B

2

MOM. ON

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

3

8

3

2

ON

UP Position

4 5B

7

2 2

6

3581

2

2

1 2B

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

CENTER Position

10 3

2

2

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Two-Pole Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position) 5004

ON 3

1 6 2A

ON

UP Position

OFF

5005

5B

2B

8

9

10

5561 3

1 6 2A

4 5A 8

7

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

5562

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

3

1 6 2A

4 5A

7

8

9

10

5563 3

1 6 2A

4 5A

7

8

9

10

5564 3

1 6 2A

4 5A

7

8

9

10

5565 3

1 6 2A

4 5A

7

8

5566 3

1 6 2A

4 5A

7

7

8

9

10

5567 3

1 6 2A

4 5A

5582

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2B

7

8

9

10

5568 3

1 6 2A

2B

5B 8

5583 9

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-10 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

4 5A

2A-1-10 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

ON

OFF

8

2A-1 5A-4

2A-2B 5A-5B

5B

2B 7

8

9

10

5584

5B

7

8

9

10

5585

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3 5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-4

2B-3-10 5B-6

2

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2

2B-1-10 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

2–ON

1–ON

OFF

2B-1 5B-4

2B-3 5B-4

2B-3-9 5B-6

ON

NONE

ON

4

1 6 2B

5B

7

8

5586 10 4

1 6 2B

5B

7

8

9

10

5587 4

1 6 2B

5B

7

8

9

10

5588 1

6

2B

4 5B

7

8

6001 9

2B-3 5B-6

4

1 6 2B

2B-3 5B-6

2B-3 5B-4

10

3

5B

2B-1 5B-4

4

1 6

9

2A-1 5A-4

OFF

10

7

6

7 3

4

1

5A

2A

5B

2B

10

8

2

1–ON

4

1 6

3

5B

2B

8

3

5B

2B

5B

2

2–ON

4

1 6 2B

10

9

10

3

5B

2B

9

5581

3

5B

2B

8

3

5B

2B

5B

9

2A-1 5A-4

UP Position

4

7

3

5B

2B

1 6 2B

10

9

CENTER Position

10

3

5B

2B

9 3

5A

DOWN Position

Schematic Circuit No. (Shown in UP Position)

4

7

7

CENTER Position

10

9

2

Circuit with Rocker In …

2A-2B-5A-5B- — 10-1-4-3

3-6-1

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-29

2.2 2 2

NGR Rocker Switches

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Switch Base with Rocker Button 1.734 ± 0.005 (44.04 ± 0.13)

2

0.867 ± 0.005 (22.02 ± 0.13)

2 2

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.01 ± 0.25) 0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.) Decorative Rocker

LEGEND AREA “A”

2 2

LEGEND AREA “B”

LEGEND AREA “A”

SIL Rocker (Snap-In Lens)

0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.)

2 2

Orientation Examples of “Standard” Orientation of Icons

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

2 2

Terminals 8 and 10

0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.)

2 2

ROAD LAMP

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

2 2

Terminals 7 and 9

Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.039 to 0.157 in (1.00 to 4.00) mm (Best results obtained between 0.059 and 0.118 in [1.50 and 3.00 mm])

LEGEND AREA “B”

2

Rockers

0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.)

On Indicator “A” 0.100 ± 0.005 (2.54 ± 0.13)

2

1.024 ± .010 (26.01 ± 0.25)

On Indicator “B”

A B C

0.500 ± 0.010 (12.70 ± 0.25)

0.345 ± 0.010 (8.76 ± 0.25)

2

0.054 ± 0.005 (1.37 ± 0.13)

2 2

1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.)

2

0.408 ± 0.010 (10.36 ± 0.25)

2 2

0.250 ± 0.005 (6.35 ± 0.13)

2

0.462 ± 0.005 (11.73 ± 0.13)

0.0305/0.032 (0.775/0.813) 0.523 ± 0.005 (13.28 ± 0.13)

0.144 ± 0.005 (3.66 ± 0.13)

2

7

5A 5B

6

5B

USA

9

0.667 ± 0.005 (16.94 ± 0.13)

2 V11-T2-30

2A 2B

10

2

1

2B

2A

9

3

1

2

8

7

5A

2

8 6

4

2

4

0.855 ± 0.010 (21.72 ± 0.25)

3

10

0.257 ± 0.005 (6.53 ± 0.13)

0.401 ± 0.005 (10.19 ± 0.13)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.2

Rockers NGR Rocker Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Locking Rocker

2

Sealed Rocker

0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.)

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.01 ± 0.25)

A

2

B C

0.345 ± 0.010 (8.76 ± 0.25)

0.100 ± 0.005 (2.54 ± 0.13)

2

0.420 ± 0.005 (10.67 ± 0.13)

2 2

0.060 ± 0.010 (1.52 ± 0.25) Panel Seal

1.450 ± 0.040 (36.83 ± 1.02)

1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.)

2

0.345 ± 0.010 (8.76 ± 0.25)

B C

A

2 2

0.408 ± 0.010 (10.36 ± 0.25)

0.408 ± 0.010 (10.36 ± 0.25)

2 2

0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.)

0.320 ± 0.005 Max. (8.13 ± 0.13 Max.) 0.245 ± 0.005 (6.22 ± 0.13)

2

LEGEND AREA “B”

0.500 ± 0.005 Max. (12.70 ± 0.13 Max.)

LEGEND AREA “A”

LEGEND AREA “B”

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.0 ± 0.25)

2

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

2 2

Indicator

2

Label Rocker Surface Length Along Bottom

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

2

0.375 ± 0.010 (9.53 ± 0.25)

LEGEND AREA “B”

0.500 Max. (12.70 Max.)

LEGEND AREA “A”

1.128 ± 0.010 (28.65 ± 0.25)

0.320 Max. (8.13 Max.)

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.01 ± 0.25)

0.580 ± 0.008 (14.73 ± 0.020)

2 2

0.470 ± 0.010 (11.94 ± 0.25)

2 2

R0.060 ± 0.005 (R1.52 ± 0.13)

0.095 ± 0.005 (2.42 ± 0.13)

2

0.020 ± 0.005 (5.08 ± 0.13)

2

12° ± 1° 0.100 ± 0.005 (2.54 ± 0.13) Rotated 12° CCW Graphics Window

1.800 Max. (45.42 Max.)

Note: Graphics window may be on both ends or either end of part. Dimensions shown are typical.

0.408 ± 0.010 (10.36 ± 0.25)

2 2 2 2

0.0305/0.032 (0.775/0.813)

2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-31

2.3 2

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Contents

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker

Description

2

Page

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers Above Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Below Panel Rocker Switch . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2

V11-T2-34 V11-T2-35 V11-T2-36 V11-T2-37 V11-T2-38

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description The Sealed Vehicle Rocker (SVR) switch from Eaton’s electrical business now offers an above panel actuator style in addition to the below panel and paddle actuators. Designed to meet the severe environmental requirements of the construction and agricultural vehicle markets, the SVR is sealed at the front and back of the switch and meets the rigorous sealing requirements of IP68. The small switch footprint minimizes the space taken on switch panels. SVR switches are assembled into panels by pressing the switch through the top of the panel and are held in place by retention tabs molded into the body of the switch; mounting hardware or special tools are not necessary.

Features The SVR is offered in singleand two-pole switch circuits, with two- and three-position momentary and maintained circuits available. Switch and illumination circuits are terminated with 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminals. The SVR connector can be loaded with the appropriate terminals and/or wire seals to accomplish sealing at the back end of the switch.

You can order assembled switches or the switch base and actuator separately.

Actuator Styles ●

Use the final code in the switch base catalog number, Pages V11-T2-34 and V11-T2-35, to denote assembly instructions.

Actuator



The SVR switch family includes three styles of actuators: above panel, below panel and paddle. Switch performance and specifications are the same for all actuator styles. Black is standard, but other colors are also available. Matte finish is standard on all actuator styles, matching the finish on the bezels and all other visible SVR switch features and accessories.



Above panel rocker button offers new styling and a larger surface area. Eaton can offer assistance with unique designs of above panel actuators for applications where differentiation is desired Below panel rocker button is the same two-faced European styling that has been offered for SVR since its initial release. Indicator style matches the below panel rocker button style Paddle actuator allows toggle-type actuation of the SVR switch

Standards and Certifications

2



2



2 ●

2

Approvable under stringent UL and CSA standards For information, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative RoHS Compliant 1

2 Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 2 V11-T2-32

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Illumination

Snap-in Lenses

Long life LEDs provide backlighting illumination for the SVR switch. Backlighting can be either independent of or dependent on the switch circuits, or a combination of both. Standard LED color is amber, with red, green and blue also available. LED protection circuitry is available to protect the LED from overvoltage and reverse voltage conditions.



Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more specific information about standard and custom circuit options.

Backlighting ●







Each switch can accommodate up to two LEDs that can be connected to be either circuit dependent or independent Standard LED color is amber, with red, green and blue also available. Long life (100,000 hours) LEDs are standard Standard LED voltages are 12 and 24 Vdc The below panel rocker button style includes a single-piece back-lit actuator with laser-etched icons in either daylight white or deadfront styles. Without illumination, the icon is either daylight white or deadfront, but will change to the color of the chosen light source when illuminated

Above and below panel rocker buttons are available with or without one or two translucent lenses. Five standard lens colors are available: white, red, green, blue and amber

Icons ●

Icon areas are provided on each end of the rocker button. Icons may be illuminated or nonilluminated and are padprinted in a contrasting color either directly on the rocker button or the lens

Mounting Means Snap-in mounting using four flexible plastic retainers integral with switch frame.

Circuits The SVR switch is capable of single- or two-pole configurations with two- or three-position maintained, momentary or a combination of actuations. The addition of jumpers between switch terminals expands the circuit possibilities.

Standard Circuit Options ON–NONE–ON ● ON–OFF–ON ● ON*–OFF–ON* ● ON*–OFF–ON ● ON–ON–ON ● ON*–NONE–ON ● ON*–ON–ON* ● ON*–ON–ON ●

Options ●

● ● ●

● ●

Note: * = Momentary. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37.

Sealing SVR design includes a sealed contact chamber with dust and water resistance to IP68. The harness connection can also be sealed by using AMP wire seals Catalog Number 828905-1 (14–16 gauge) or 828904-1 (18–20 gauge) to seal the wires to the connector. For an application where a connector cavity is not being used, it can be sealed with AMP sealing plug Catalog Number 828922-1. The above panel version may also be sealed to the panel using panel seal Catalog Number 32-2245.

2.3













Additional colors of actuators, mounting bezels and lenses Special circuits Special ratings Pad printing on the below panel switch bezel Low current capabilities Custom back-lit icons Gang-mount system including end bezel Catalog Number 17-22146 and center bezel 17-22152 Palm Guard (below panel switch only) at either or both ends of the switch frame Indicators with insertable lenses Polarized lock-on connector Catalog Number 25-13936 Panel plug with connector retention feature Catalog Number 17-22145 Non-illuminated below panel paddle actuator

Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for additional information on options.

Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more specific information about SVR standard and custom circuit options.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-33

2.3

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Above Panel Rocker Switch

2 2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Above Panel Rocker Switch

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

2 2

S

AC

Switch Series

M

2X

D

G AT

R

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

M = Standard

Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits 2nd Digit (Illumination) Single-Pole Illumination A = None C = Top/left (D) A = ON–NONE–ON D = Bottom/right (D) 1 C = ON–NONE–ON E = Top/left (I) D = ON–OFF–ON F = Bottom/right (I) 1 E = ON–OFF–ON G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) F = ON*–OFF–ON* H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1 J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) H = ON*–OFF–ON K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) 1 J = ON*–OFF–ON Two-Pole Illumination K = ON–ON–ON 2 R = None L = ON–ON–ON 12 S = Top/left (D) M = ON*–NONE–ON T = Bottom/right (D) P = ON*–NONE–ON 1 U = Top/left (I) R = ON*–ON–ON* 2 V = Bottom/right (I) S = ON*–ON–ON* 12 W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) T = ON*–ON–ON Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) U = ON*–ON–ON 1 3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) 4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I)

1st Digit (Circuit)

KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.

2 2

LED Wavelengths: Red = ~630 Nm Amber = ~592 Nm Green = ~526 Nm Blue = ~472 Nm

2 2 2

LED (Top/Left) 1st Digit X = None 14V Standard J = Red K = Green L = Amber (standard) M = Blue 14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 1 = Red 2 = Green 3 = Amber (standard) 7 = Blue 28V Standard E = Red F = Green G = Amber (standard) H = Blue 28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 4 = Red 5 = Green 6 = Amber (standard) 8 = Blue

LED (Bottom/Right) 2nd Digit X = None Same codes available as 1st digit.

2

X

Frame

S = SVR

2 2

AC C= D= E= F=

Actuator Style No lens Top/left lens only Bottom/right lens only Top/left and Bottom/right lenses

Lens Color (Top/Left) X = None R = Red G = Green B = Blue A = Amber W = White

Icon (Top/Left) XX = None AT = Work light See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

Lens Color (Bottom/Right) X = None R = Red G = Green B = Blue A = Amber W = White

Icon (Bottom/Right) XX = None AC = Fast See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

Notes 1 Gold plated. 2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.

2 2 2 V11-T2-34

X

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only.

Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only.

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2.3

Below Panel Rocker Switch

2 2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Below Panel Rocker Switch To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate switch series and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

S

AC

S

2X

Switch Series S= T= B= F=

S = SVR

Switch Circuits/Illumination Circuits 2nd Digit (Illumination) 1st Digit (Circuit) Single-Pole Illumination A = None C = Top/left (D) A = ON–NONE–ON D = Bottom/right (D) C = ON–NONE–ON 1 E = Top/left (I) D = ON–OFF–ON F = Bottom/right (I) E = ON–OFF–ON 1 G = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) F = ON*–OFF–ON* H = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) G = ON*–OFF–ON* 1 J = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) H = ON*–OFF–ON K = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) J = ON*–OFF–ON 1 Two-Pole Illumination K = ON–ON–ON 2 R = None L = ON–ON–ON 12 S = Top/left (D) M = ON*–NONE–ON T = Bottom/right (D) P = ON*–NONE–ON 1 U = Top/left (I) R = ON*–ON–ON* 2 V = Bottom/right (I) S = ON*–ON–ON* 12 W = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (I) T = ON*–ON–ON Y = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (D) U = ON*–ON–ON 1 3 = Top/left (D)/bottom/right (D) 4 = Top/left (I)/bottom/right (I) 1st and 2nd Digit Indicators NE = 7–9 Illumination NF = 8–10 Illumination NK = Dual Illumination N9 = Dual Illumination with 8–9 jumper KEY: * = Momentary, (I) = Independent, (D) = Dependent.

3

G AT

R AC

Frame Standard—Below panel Palm Guard—Top/left Palm Guard—Bottom/right Palm Guard—Full

LED (Top/Left) 1st Digit X = None 14V Standard J = Red K = Green L = Amber (standard) M = Blue 14V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 1 = Red 2 = Green 3 = Amber (standard) 7 = Blue 28V Standard E = Red F = Green G = Amber (standard) H = Blue 28V Over/Reverse Voltage Protection 4 = Red 5 = Green 6 = Amber (standard) 8 = Blue

LED (Bottom/Right) 2nd Digit X = None Same codes available as 1st digit. LED Wavelengths: Red = ~630 Nm Amber = ~592 Nm Green = ~526 Nm Blue = ~472 Nm

X X

Actuator Style 1 = No lens 2 = Top/left lens only 3 = Bottom/right lens only 4 = Top/left and bottom/right lenses 5 = Paddle—No lens 6 = Indicator—Top/left lens 7 = Indicator—Bottom/right lens 8 = Indicator—Top/left and Bottom/ right lens 9 = Indicator—No lens A = Decorative rocker

2 Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only.

Special Feature X = None For Eaton use only.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Lens Color (Top/Left) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color 1 = Daylight white 2 = Deadfront

2 2 2 2

Icon (Top/Left) XX = None AT = Work light See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

2 2 2

Lens Color (Bottom/Right) X = None B = Blue R = Red A = Amber G = Green W = White Decorative Icon Color 1 = Daylight white 2 = Deadfront

2 2 2 2

Icon (Bottom/Right) XX = None AC = Fast See Symbols Library on Pages V11-T2-80 to V11-T2-84 and V11-T2-95 to V11-T2-102.

2 2 2

Notes 1 Gold plated. 2 Two-pole only. See Electrical Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-37 and Illumination Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-38.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2

2 V11-T2-35

2.3

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rocker

2 2

Description

Specification

Ratings

12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc, can be approved under stringent UL and CSA standards

Electrical life Standard plating

2

50,000 operations at 12A at either 12 or 24 Vdc. Life cycle testing conducted using both inductive and resistive loads

Gold plating

250,000 (maintained circuits)/50,000 (momentary circuits) operations at 10 mA at either 12 or 24 Vdc

2

Mechanical life

2 2 2 2 2

Maintained circuits

250,000 operations minimum

Momentary circuits

50,000 operations minimum

Circuits

Single- or two-pole, two- or three-position, with momentary and maintained capabilities

Dielectric strength

1500 volts rms minimum

Operate force

1–3 lbs (4.4–13.2 Nm) depending on circuit configuration and actuator style

Temperature Operating range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Storage range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Contact material

2

Movable Stationary

Silver-plated copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface

2

Gold-plated

Contacts are available for low level electrical loads

2 2 2 2 2 2

Copper alloy with silver alloy contact surface

Terminal type

Standard 0.11 in (2.8 mm) tin-plated copper alloy spade terminal Mates to AMP Junior Power Timer Terminals 1 Catalog Number 927766-3 (14–16 gauge) Catalog Number 927770-3 (18–20 gauge)

Plastic component UL ratings Base material

UL 94 V-O

Frame material

UL 94 H-B

IP rating

IP68

Sub-actuator material

UL 94 V-O

Actuator material

UL 94 V-0 (above panel rocker button) UL 94 H-B (below panel rocker button and paddle actuator)

Mounting hole

Standard panel cutout of 1.45 x 0.83 in (36.8 x 21.1 mm)

2

Panel thickness

0.04 to 0.16 in (1.0 to 4.0 mm) Best results obtained between 0.06 and 0.12 in (1.5 and 3.0 mm)

2

Note 1 See also Sealing, Page V11-T2-33, for additional AMP components to seal the connector interface.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-36

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.3

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Circuit Diagrams

2

Switch Circuit Schematics

Code A C (Gold)

7 2 5

3

2–3

4

7 2

3

9

1 6 4

8 7 2 5

3

NONE



BOTTOM/ RIGHT Actuated ON

Code A C (Gold)

2–3

9

5

OFF



ON

D E (Gold)

MOM. ON

OFF

2

3

9

1 6 4

5

2

5



F G (Gold)

4

3

4

2

5

3

2–3

OFF



ON

H J (Gold)

4 10

7 2

2–1

5

3

K L (Gold)

4 10

7 2

Two-pole only 5

3

7 2

3

9

NONE

ON

M P (Gold)

4 10

7 2

1 6 4

5

MOM. ON

2–3



2–1

5

10

8

3

R S (Gold)

4 10

7 2

Two-pole only 5

3

7 2

3

9

MOM. ON

ON

ON

T U (Gold)

4

9

7 2

5

2–3

6 4 10

2–1

5 8

BOTTOM/ RIGHT Actuated

2 2

ON

NONE

ON

2–3 5–6

— —

2–1 5–4

2

ON

OFF

ON

2

2–3 5–6

— —

2–1 5–4

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

2–3 5–6

— —

2–1 5–4

2

MOM. ON

OFF

ON

2

2–3 5–6

— —

2–1 5–4

ON

ON

ON

2–3 5–6

5–4–2–3

5–4–2–1

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

2–3 5–6

— —

2–1 5–4

MOM. ON

ON

MOM. ON

2–3 5–6

5–4–2–3

5–4–2–1

2

MOM. ON

ON

ON

2

2–3 5–6

2–1 5–4

2–1 5–4

2

2 2 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

3 1 6

2–1

CENTER

2 2

10

1

8

9

1 6

8

T U (Gold)

9

1 6

8

R S (Gold)

9

1 6

8

M P (Gold)

9

1 6

8

K L (Gold)

9

1 6

8

MOM. ON

9

10

7

2–1

10

8

1 6 10

7

2–1

MOM. ON

9

1 6

10

7

2

3

8

2–3

4

7

8

ON

TOP/ LEFT Actuated

Two-Pole Schematic (Shown in Top/left Actuated Position)

2–1

10

1 6

8

H J (Gold)

ON

CENTER

10

5

F G (Gold)

9

1 6

8

D E (Gold)

TOP/ LEFT Actuated

Single-Pole Schematic (Shown in Top/left Actuated Position)

4 10

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-37

2.3 2 2 2

Dimensions

SinglePole Code

Above Panel Rocker

TwoPole Code

Schematic 1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

A

R

None

Above Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator

C

S

2 D

T

2 2

E

U

2 2 2

F

V

2 2

G

W

2 H

Y

J

3

2 K

4

2 2 2

Illumination Code 9

2 2 2 2 2

8

10

7 +

0.945 ± 0.010 (24.00 ± 0.25) 0.400 ± 0.010 (10.16 ± 0.25)

9

10 +

7 +

9

8

10

7 +

9

8

10 +

7 +

9 3

7 +

1.870 ± 0.010 (47.50 ± 0.25)

0.300 ± 0.010 (7.62 ± 0.25)

3

8

ICON AREA T/L

ICON AREA B/R

0.052 ± 0.010 (1.32 ± 0.25)

Top/Left Actuated Center Bottom/Right Actuated

0.807 ± 0.010 (20.50 ± 0.25)

1.418 ± 0.010 (36.00 ± 0.25)

10 + 9 3

Panel Seal Gasket (Above Only)

Panel Opening (Above and Below)

8

10 +

7 +

9 3 1

8

10 +

7 +

9

8

10 +

Schematic 1 7 +

9

8

10 +

1.450 (36.80) 1.700 ± 0.010 (43.18 ± 0.25)

1.190 (30.20)

1.450 ± 0.010 (36.83 ± 0.25)

0.812 ± 0.010 (20.62 ± 0.25)

1.190 ± 0.010 (30.23 ± 0.25) 0.680 (17.30)

0.830 (21.10)

0.680 ± 0.010 (17.27 ± 0.25)

R0.060 ± 0.010 (R1.52 ± 0.25) 0.950 ± 0.010 (24.13 ± 0.25)

Note: Recommended panel thickness 0.039–0.157 in (1.00–4.00 mm). Best results obtained between 0.059 and 0.118 in (1.50 and 3.00 mm).

Note 1 LED for terminals 7–9 is at top/left side of switch. LED for terminals 8–10 is at bottom/right of switch.

2 V11-T2-38

1.299 ± 0.010 (33.00 ± 0.25)

0.810 ± 0.010 (20.60 ± 0.25)

Catalog Number 32-2245

2 2

9 3

8

2 2

7 +

1.400 ± 0.010 (35.60 ± 0.25)

2 2

SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Illumination Schematics

2 2

Rockers

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

2.3

Below Panel Rocker

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Below Panel Rocker Switch with Actuator 0.980 ± 0.010 (25.00 ± 0.25) 0.390 ± 0.005 (9.90 ± 0.13)

2 ICON AREA T/L

0.270 ± 0.005 (6.90 ± 0.13)

0.446 ± 0.010 (11.40 ± 0.25)

2

1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

2

ICON AREA B/R

2

Top/Left Actuated Center Bottom/Right Actuated

2 2 2

0.100 ± 0.010 (2.60 ± 0.25)

1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

2 0.810 ± 0.010 (20.60 ± 0.25)

1.400 ± 0.010 (35.60 ± 0.25)

Panel Actuator (Below Panel Only)

2

1.610 ± 0.010 (40.89 ± 0.25)

2

Panel Guard (Below Panel Only)

2

0.940 ± 0.010 (23.88 ± 0.25)

0.551 ± 0.010 (14.00 ± 0.25)

0.102 ± 0.010 (2.60 ± 0.25)

1.054 ± 0.010 (26.78 ± 0.25)

2 2 2

1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

1.400 ± 0.010 (35.60 ± 0.25)

2 2

0.810 ± 0.010 (20.60 ± 0.25)

2

Indicator (Below Panel Only) 0.390 ± 0.005 (9.90 ± 0.13)

0.270 ± 0.005 (6.90 ± 0.13)

0.100 ± 0.010 (2.60 ± 0.25)

2 2

ICON AREA T/L

ICON AREA B/R

2

1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

2 2

0.980 ± 0.010 (25.00 ± 0.25)

2 2 2

1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

2 2

1.400 ± 0.010 (35.60 ± 0.25)

0.810 ± 0.010 (20.60 ± 0.25)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-39

2.3 2

Rockers SVR—Sealed Vehicle Rockers

Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Gang Mount System

2

End Bezel Catalog Number 17-22146 Center Bezel Catalog Number 17-22152

2

0.820 ± 0.005 (20.88 ± 0.13)

2.020 ± 0.010 (51.37 ± 0.25)

1.020 ± 0.010 (25.96 ± 0.25)

2 2

1.770 ± 0.010 (44.88 ± 0.25)

2

1.530 ± 0.010 (38.90 ± 0.25)

2

1.450 ± 0.005 (36.80 ± 0.13)

2.050 ± 0.010 (52.00 ± 0.25)

2 2

2 End Bezels

2

1.976 ± 0.010 (50.20 ± 0.25)

2 End Bezels and 1 Center Bezel

0.640 ± 0.010 (16.36 ± 0.25)

3.000 ± 0.010 (76.20 ± 0.25)

0.150 ± 0.010 (3.75 ± 0.25)

2

1.070 ± 0.010 (27.10 ± 0.25)

2 2

Panel Opening for 2-End Bezel

1.545 ± 0.010 (39.24 ± 0.25)

Panel Opening for 2-End and 1 Center Bezel

1.545 ± 0.010 (39.24 ± 0.25) 0.540 ± 0.010 (13.64 ± 0.25)

2 2 2 2

1.000 ± 0.010 (25.51 ± 0.25) 2-End Bezel

2 Ends and 1 Center Bezel

Panel Plug

Connector

Catalog Number 17-22145

Catalog Number 25-13936

2 2

AMP Terminal Catalog Numbers: 927766-3 (14–16 gauge) 927770-3 (18–20 gauge) AMP Wire Seal Catalog Numbers: 828905-1 (14–16 gauge) 828904-1 (18–20 gauge) AMP Sealing Plug Catalog Number: 828922-1

0.980 ± 0.010 (25.00 ± 0.25)

2 1.730 ± 0.010 (44.00 ± 0.25)

2 2

0.660 ± 0.010 (16.80 ± 0.25)

1.310 ± 0.010 (33.40 ± 0.25)

0.100 ± 0.010 (2.55 ± 0.25)

1.240 ± 0.010 (31.50 ± 0.25)

2

0.580 ± 0.010 (14.75 ± 0.25)

2 2

1.730 ± 0.010 (43.95 ± 0.25)

2

0.330 ± 0.010 (8.40 ± 0.25)

2

1.400 ± 0.010 (35.56 ± 0.25)

2

0.810 ± 0.010 (20.57 ± 0.25)

2 V11-T2-40

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.020 ± 0.010 (26.00 ± 0.25)

Rockers Dual Motion Safety Switches

2.4

Contents

Dual Motion Safety Switch

Description Dual Motion Safety Switches Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Page

2

V11-T2-42 V11-T2-42

2

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Application Description

Eaton's Vehicle Control business offers these new dual motion safety switches to prevent accidental actuation and protect operator personnel and equipment.

● ●



● ●

These rockers are available in two standard circuit options: OFF (locked)—None—ON and ON (locked)—None—ON. The locked safety feature requires two motions from the operator to place the actuator in the unlocked position. In the locked position, the operator must apply pressure on the actuator forward and an additional force in an upward motion for the switch to be moved to the unlocked position. Once in the unlocked position, the switch can easily be moved back into the locked position.

Farming equipment Fire trucks and safety vehicles Lawn and garden equipment Large transportation buses Industrial and commercial equipment

Features and Benefits Dual motion safety switches are recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc. An added benefit is its IP54 seal level. They can be used in tough environments where there may be exposure to small dust particles or water splashing against the enclosure from any direction. For available higher ratings or additional customizable circuits, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

Options There are many options to choose when building the right switch for your application. Termination types to choose from include screw type, solder lug and 0.250-inch spade terminals. Actuators are available in four standard colors with an appealing matte finish. Choose from black, red, white or yellow. Eaton also offers standard and customizable legend pad printing options on top of the actuator. There is even an option for arrows to be pad printed on the sides of the rocker to indicate the correct forward motion.

2

Standards and Certifications ●



UL/CSA Recognition at 15A, 125 Vac; 10A, 250 Vac; 3/4 hp, 250 Vac RoHS Compliant 1

2 2 2 2

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 2 2 2 2 2

For added convenience, the bezel is designed to allow an easy snap-in switch mount into various panel thicknesses. The actuators even have ergonomic grooves to help provide the operator a firm grip when moving the actuator.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-41

2.4 2

Rockers Dual Motion Safety Switches

Catalog Number Selection

8179K21Z T 51 AA A Y

2 2 2

Poles and Throws

Circuit with Rocker In … Position A Center Position Position B OFF (lock) None ON ON (lock) None ON

2PST 2PDT

Base Part Number

Side Arrow Pad Prints X = None Y = Both sides

8179K21Z 8179K22Z

2 2

Rocker Color Y = Black T = Red M = White E = Yellow

2 2 2

Available Switch Pad Prints

2

Prints 2

Termination Type 50 = Screw type 51 = Solder lug 52 = Quick connect (0.250 in spade)

Top Pad Print 1 XX = None AA = PTO AB = Creeper engage AC = Retarder AD = Windrower ON/OFF AE = Rotary lock pin cylinder

A= B= C= D= X=

Icon Orientation Standard 90° clockwise 180° clockwise 270° counterclockwise None

2 2 PTO

Creeper Engage

Retarder

Windrower ON/OFF

2 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Dual Motion Safety Switch

2

0.957 (24.40)

2

0.648 (16.50)

0.102 (2.60)

2

PAD PRINT ICON

0.800 ± 0.010 (20.30 ± 0.25)

B “A” ± 0.03

A

2

0.410 ± 0.010 (10.40 ± 0.25)

2 2

1.155 (29.30)

Pad Print Arrows on Side of Rocker

2 2

1.190 (30.20)

Recommended Panel Opening Thickness 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55) Best Results Obtained from 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)

Notes 1 Black pad print color for white and yellow rockers. White pad print color for red and black rockers. 2 Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for more available pad print options.

V11-T2-42

1.450 (36.80)

0.680 (17.20) 0.830 (21.10)

0.276 (0.07)

2 2

1.548 (39.30)

Push rocker in direction of arrow to actuate from “A” to “B” position. “A” position = locked, “B” position = unlocked.

0.669 (0.17)

6

2

1.844 (46.8)

2

2

2

3 0.170 (4.32)

1

2

0.250 (6.35) (0.032 [0.80] Thick)

1

2

0.825 (20.90)

0.096 (2.40)

5

2

Dimensions

4

2

Rotary Lock Pin Cylinder

3

2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.427 (36.20)

Rockers 1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2.5

Contents

1500/2500 Series

Description

Page

1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated . . . . Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-44 V11-T2-45 V11-T2-46 V11-T2-46

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Options

Eaton’s 1500/2500 series rocker switch offers a designer touch that will enhance any product line.

High Inrush Option

Ideal applications include appliances, electronic instrumentation, data processing, communications and medical and office equipment. Custom legends are available on the switch actuator and bezel.

The 1500H/2500H is designed to handle high inrush currents up to 100A peak inrush for 10 milliseconds.

This two-color rocker version brightly indicates the ON position. This version spares the expense of more costly illuminated switches and is available with the high inrush option.

2

Note: See Catalog Number Selection for more detail.

2

International Approvals ● ●

Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option

2

Standards and Certifications

● ●

2

UL Recognized CSA Certified ENEC RoHS Compliant 1

2 2

EN EC

2 2

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-43

2.5

Rockers 1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

Midsize Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Midsize Non-Illuminated Example:

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V

2 2 2

Rating UL/CSA: 15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V

2 2 2

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1504

6

1PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF

MOM. ON ON

1506 1507

9 8

ON MOM. ON ON ON ON

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON

2500 2501 2505 2502 2503

10 11 12 13 15

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

2504

14

2PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF

MOM. ON ON

2506 2507

17 16

2PST 2PDT

Example:

2 2

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

1PDT

E

038

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

ON MOM. ON ON ON ON

1PST

1

Circuit Number 3 1 3 4 5 7

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs Note: B style terminal not offered for 1506 Series.

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

How To Order—Midsize Illuminated

2 2

2

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 2 1500 OFF 1501 OFF 1505 MOM. OFF ON 1502 MOM. ON 1503

Poles and Throw

Rating

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

1500

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

2500

1PST

ON MOM. ON

NONE NONE

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1500 OFF 1501

2PST

ON MOM. ON

NONE NONE

OFF OFF

Poles and Throw

2500 2501

G

2 2

E

725

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 3

18 21 28 30

Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 4 5 = 12V filament 4

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs

Notes 1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 #1500—#1507 switches are supplied in 1500 type base. #2500—#2507 switches are supplied in 2500 type base. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 4 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

V11-T2-44

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Legend Type (Optional) 725 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

Rockers 1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2.5

Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection How To Order—Hi-Lite Rocker with High Inrush Option

1500H

Example:

Poles and Throw

Rating UL/CSA:15A 125 Vac, 10A 250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

1PST

1PST

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Pos. Position

ON MOM. ON

ON

NONE NONE

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number OFF OFF

NONE

1 2

1500 _ 1501 _

OFF

1500H

E

2

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number. Circuit Number 3

1 3

2

4

1

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Hi-Lite Color 1 = Black 5 = Gray 2 = White 6 = Red 4 = Green 7 = Yellow

Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs 4

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

2 2 2

Example:

Poles and Throw

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Pos. Position

1500H

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number

1

2 E

2

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number. Circuit Number 3

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

1500H

1

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

2500H

10

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect

Example:

Poles and Throw

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Pos. Position

2500H

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

1500H

18

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

2500H

28

2 2 2

725

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to Base Circuit Number.

2

G

2 2

E

Circuit Number 3

2

2

How To Order—High Inrush Illuminated

Rating UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125–250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

2

2

How To Order—High Inrush, Non-Illuminated

Rating UL/CSA: 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125-250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

2

Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear)

Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 4 = 6V filament 5 5 = 12V filament 5 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Legend Type (Optional) 725 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

2 2 2 2 2

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/ 0.25 in quick connect

2

Notes 1 1500 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #2. 1500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2500H Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 High inrush capabilities available only on basic catalog numbers beginning with 1500H. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 4 Standard rating only. 5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 2 2 V11-T2-45

2.5

Rockers 1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated

2

Technical Data and Specifications

2

1500/2500—Midsize AC Rated Description

Specification

Description

Specification

2

Ratings

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-44 and V11-T2-45.

Mechanical life

50,000 cycles minimum

Seal level

IP40

Insulation resistance

50M ohms minimum

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

2

Circuits Standard

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, maintained and momentary

Terminal types

2

High inrush option

1PST, 2PST, maintained

Standard

6.3 mm Tabs/0.250 in Quick Connect

Hi-lite option

1PST, maintained

Optional

Solder lug

2

Contact mechanism Standard

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Common (center)

2

High inrush option

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break

End

Copper

Make—High inrush option

100A peak inrush at 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles minimum

Lamp

Brass

Break—High inrush option

16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles minimum

Mounting

See dimensions below

Contact material

Silver inlay over copper

32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)

2

Operating temperature range

Contact resistance

10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc

2

Dimensions

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

2 2

Termination material

1500/1500H Type Base 0.287 (7.30) Max.

Matte Finish Bezel Matte Finish Rocker (Non-Illuminated) Translucent Rocker (Illuminated)

1.248 (31.70) Max.

2

0.024 ± 0.004 (0.60 ± 0.10)

Combination Quick Connect/ Solder Lug Code “E” 0.249 ± 0.001 (6.325 ± 0.03) Wide 0.032 ± 0.001 (0.815 ± 0.02) Thick

0.595 (15.11) Max.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Hole Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom. 0.380 ± 0.002.0.003 (9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

2

0.422 ± 0.003 (10.73 ± 0.08)

0.756 (19.20) Nom.

0.042 ± 0.002 (2.05 ± 0.05)

0.982 ± 0.010 (24.95 ± 0.30)

1.070 (27.18) Max.

0.909 ± 0.017 (23.09 ± 0.44)

0.888 ± 0.002 (22.55 ± 0.05)

0.483 ± 0.003 (12.27 ± 0.07) 1.075 ± 0.004 (27.30 ± 0.10)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.011 (8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.031–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

2500/2500H Type Base 0.287 (7.30) Max.

2 2

Copper fine silver-plated

1.248 (31.70) Max.

Matte Finish Bezel Matte Finish Rocker (Non-Illuminated) Translucent Rocker (Illuminated)

0.024 ± 0.004 (0.60 ± 0.10)

1.028 (26.11) Max.

2 2

Hole Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.

2

0.380 ± 0.002/0.003 (9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

0.909 ± 0.017 (23.09 ± 0.44)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.011 0.756 (8.90 ± 0.25/0.26) (19.20) Nom. Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

2 2

Combination Quick Connect/ Solder Lug Code “E” 0.249 ± 0.001 (6.325 ± 0.03) Wide 0.032 ± 0.001 (0.815 ± 0.02) Thick

0.042 ± 0.002 (2.05 ± 0.05) 0.422 ± 0.003 (10.73 ± 0.08) 0.982 ± 0.011 (24.95 ± 0.30) 0.888 ± 0.002 (22.55 ± 0.05) Hole Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.

1.070 (27.18) Max.

0.876 ± 0.004 (22.25 ± 0.10)

1.075 ± 0.004 (27.30 ± 0.10)

1.026 ± 0.002 (26.05 ± 0.05) 0.327 (8.31) Nom.

Panel Opening Panel Thickness: 0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

0.658 ± 0.004 (16.712 ± 0.14)

0.868 ± 0.002 (22.05 ± 0.05)

2 V11-T2-46

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Hole Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom. 0.474 ± 0.002 (12.05 ± 0.05)

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

Contents

1600/2600 Series

Description

Page

1600/2600—Midsize AC Only Non-Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated Rocker . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Splashguard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . High Inrush Rockers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-48 V11-T2-49 V11-T2-50 V11-T2-51 V11-T2-52 V11-T2-52 V11-T2-53 V11-T2-53

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Options

Eaton’s 1600/2600 series of midsize snap-in rocker and paddle switches have worldwide approvals at up to 16A, 250 Vac. One switch can be used for both domestic and foreign markets.

High Inrush Option

Ideal applications include appliances, electronic instrumentation, data processing, communications, medical equipment, office equipment and many more. A wide circuit variety is offered in a choice of standard and custom colors for illuminated and nonilluminated versions. Custom legends are available on the switch lever and bezel. High inrush and splashguard are also available.

This version features a uniquely designed seal that resists moisture and water, making it ideally suited for marine, RV and food processing applications. The oversized nylon lever with smooth, matte finish features a convenient thumb depression to ensure effortless touch control. Two-pole switches feature both a thumb depression and a convex curve. See Page V11-T2-50.

The 1600H/2600H is designed to handle high inrush currents up to 100A peak inrush for 10 milliseconds.

2

Note: See Catalog Number Selection for more detail.

2

International Approvals ● ●

Splashguard Option

2

Standards and Certifications

● ●

2

UL Recognized CSA Certified 1 ENEC RoHS Compliant 2

2 2

EN EC

2 2

Notes 1 Splashguard option is cRU marked only. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-47

2.6

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Non-Illuminated Rocker

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection How To Order—Non-Illuminated Rocker Example:

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Rating UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V

Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

ON MOM. ON ON ON ON

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

1600

M 2

OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON

Rocker 1600 1601 1605 1602 1603

Paddle 1 P1600 P1601 P1605 P1602 P1603

Circuit Number 1 3 4 5 7

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1604

P1604

6

1PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF

MOM. ON ON

1606 1607

P1606 P1607

9 8

ON MOM. ON ON ON ON

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

OFF OFF MOM. OFF ON MOM. ON

2600 2601 2605 2602 2603

P2600 P2601 P2605 P2602 P2603

10 11 12 13 15

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

2604

P2604

14

2PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF

MOM. ON ON

2606 2607

P2606 P2607

17 16

2PST 2PDT

3

Finish

4

Blank = Standard M = Matte

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Rocker/Paddle Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

Notes 1 Paddles are UL, CSA only. 2 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 4 To order the standard, add a “dash” to the catalog number. Example: 1600–11E.

2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-48

E

038

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

Base Circuit Number DOWN 2 Position

1

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

2.6

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Illuminated Rocker To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Illuminated Rocker

2

Example:

1621 X

W 5

3

E

038

2

X = Independent lamp

Rating UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

ON MOM. ON ON MOM. ON ON ON ON

NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE NONE

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

1624X

4

1PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF

MOM. ON ON

1626X 1627X

4

2PST

ON MOM. ON ON

NONE NONE NONE

OFF OFF MOM. OFF

2600 2601 2605

28 30 31



Indicator





1609

32

Poles and Throw

1PST

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

DOWN 1 Position Base Circuit Number 1600 OFF 1601 OFF 1620X OFF 1621X OFF 1625X MOM. OFF ON 1622X MOM. ON 1623X

1PDT UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 10A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 10(2)A 250V UL/CSA: 16A 125–250 Vac, 10A 28 Vdc, 8A 14VT; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V —

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

2

Circuit Number 18 21 20 4

3

Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

4 4 4

4

Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 5 5 = 12V filament 5

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect B = Solder lugs

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 1600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminal #3. 2600 Type—Lever depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2 #1600—#1609 switches are supplied in 1600 type base. #1620—#1627 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. (Must have an “X” code.) #2600—#2605 switches are supplied in 2600 type base. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 4 All independent lamps for IP switches to be assembled from terminal positions #24 and #26. 5 6V, 12V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-49

2.6

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Splashguard

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Splashguard 1 Example:

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Rating

Poles and Throw

2

1PST

16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac

1PDT

10A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 16A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 10A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac

1PDT 2PST 2PDT 2PDT

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

NONE NONE NONE ON MOM. ON MOM. ON NONE NONE NONE ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF OFF OFF ON OFF OFF OFF

DOWN Position

ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

B1600

1

Base Circuit Number B1600 B1601 B1602 B1604 B1606 B1607 B2600 B2601 B2602 B2604 B2606 B2607

Circuit Number 3 1 2 5 6 9 8 10 11 13 14 17 16

Base Color 1 = Black

Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red 4 = Green 5 = Gray

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Splashguard

Ø 0.560 (14.22) (2)

17°

1.800 (45.72)

1.000 (25.40)

2

0.474 ± 0.001 (12.05 ± 0.05)

2 2

Hole Ø 0.106 nom. (2.70)

0.868 ± 0.001 (22.05 ± 0.05) Single-Pole

0.81 + 0.02/–0.01 (0.032) Thick

Two-Pole

1.026 ± 0.001 (26.05 ± 0.05) 0.424 + 0.003/–0.004 (10.75 + 0.11/–0.10)

0.758 ± 0.005 (19.26 ± 0.14) 1.070 (27.18)

0.888 ± 0.001 (22.05 ± 0.05)

2 2

Hole Ø 0.106 nom. (2.70)

0.500 (12.70)

0.249 (6.32 + 0.03/–0.02) Wide

2 2

Terminal Type E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect

Dimensions

2 2

E

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

2 2

2

0.876 ± 0.003 (22.25 ± 0.10)

0.483 ± 0.002 (12.27 ± 0.007)

1.075 ± 0.003 (27.30 ± 0.10)

Panel Thickness 0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

1.075 ± 0.003 (27.30 ± 0.10)

Panel Opening

Notes 1 Splashguard is CUR marked, but does not have ENEC approval. 2 All circuits also recommended 10A, 28 Vdc. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78.

2 2 V11-T2-50

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Panel Thickness 0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

High Inrush Rockers

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection How To Order—Non-Illuminated High Inrush Rockers Example:

Rating UL/CSA: 1 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125–250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V

Poles and Throw 1PST

2PST

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

ON ON

ON

NONE NONE

NONE

1600H

DOWN 2 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1600H OFF 1620H 3

OFF

2600H

M 2

1

2

E 038

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

2

Circuit Number Finish

5

4

E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

10

2

Terminal Type

Blank = Standard M = Matte

1 2

2 2

Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

2 2

Rocker Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

2 2

How To Order—Illuminated High Inrush Rockers Example:

Rating UL/CSA: 1 22A 125 Vac, 16A 250 Vac, 6A 125 VacL, 10A 14VT, 1 hp 125–250 Vac; ENEC: 16(4)A 250V —

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

1600H

1PST

ON ON

NONE NONE

DOWN 2 Position Base Circuit Number OFF 1600H OFF 1620HX 6

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

Poles and Throw

2600H

R

2

1

E

038

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 5

18 19

Lens/Rocker Color A = Amber G = Green R = Red W = White (clear)

Base and Bezel Color 1 = Black 2 = White 3 = Red

2 Legend Type (Optional) 038 = ON/OFF See Most Popular Legends table on Page V11-T2-53.

28 Terminal Type



Indicator

Indicator



1609

32

Lamp Voltage 0 = No lamp 1 = 125V neon 2 = 250V neon 4 = 6V filament 8 5 = 12V filament 8 6 = 24V filament 8

2 2 2 2

E = 6.3 mm tabs/0.25 in quick connect

2 2 2

Notes 1 UL, CSA: 1 hp at 125V or 250 Vac; 6A, 125 Vac (L) rating; 10A, 14 Vdc. Marked on request only. 2 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #2. 2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 3 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H base. 4 No code required. 5 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 6 1620H switch is supplied in 2600H type base. (Must have “X” code.) 7 1600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminal #3. 1620H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 2600H Type—Rocker depressed toward terminals #13 and #26. 8 6V, 12V, 24V filament lamps are not UL, CSA, or ENEC.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-51

2.6 2 2 2 2 2

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

Technical Data and Specifications 1600/2600—Midsize AC Rated Description

Specification

Description

Specification

Ratings

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-48 to V11-T2-51.

Insulation resistance

100M ohms minimum

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Circuits Standard

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT maintained and momentary

High inrush option

1PST, 2PST maintained

Terminal types

Contact mechanism

Standard

6.3 mm tabs/0.250 in quick connect

Optional

Solder lug

Standard

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

High inrush option

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact with mechanical break

Termination material Common (center)

Copper fine silver-plated

2

Make—High inrush option

100A, 250 Vac for 10 ms for 10,000 cycles min.

End

Copper

Break—High inrush option

16A, 250 Vac for 10,000 cycles min.

Lamp

2

Contact material

Silver inlay over copper

Mounting

See dimensions below

Contact resistance

10M ohms max. at 1A, 4 Vdc

Operating temperature range

32° to 185°F (0° to 85°C)

2

Mechanical life

50,000 cycles minimum

2

Dimensions

2

1600/1600H Type Base

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

36°

Combination Quick Connect/Solder Lug Code “E” 0.249 ± 0.001 (6.33 ± 0.03) Wide 0.032 ± 0.001 (0.82 ± 0.02) Thick 0.279 ± 0.004 (7.10 ± 0.10)

0.024 ± 0.004 (0.60 ± 0.10)

2 2 2 2 2

Hole Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom.

1.075 ± 0.004 (27.30 ± 0.10)

Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

Panel Thickness 0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

2600/2600H Type Base 1.197 (30.40) Max.

0.024 ± 0.004 (0.60 ± 0.10)

36˚ 0.287 (7.30) Max.

18˚

1.023 ± 0.004 (26.00 ± 0.10)

2

0.982 ± 0.010 (24.95 ± 0.30)

0.042 ± 0.002 (2.05 ± 0.05)

Combination Quick Connect/Solder Lug Code “E” 0.249 ± 0.001 (6.33 ± 0.03) Wide (0.032 ± 0.001 (0.82 ± 0.02) Thick

2

2

0.474 ± 0.002 (12.05 ± 0.05) 0.483 ± 0.003 (12.27 ± 0.07)

0.756 (19.20) Nom.

2

2

Hole Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom.

0.888 ± 0.002 (22.55 ± 0.05)

0.909 ± 0.017 (23.09 ± 0.44)

2

2

1.070 (27.18) Max.

0.380 ± 0.002/0.003 (9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

2 2

0.042 ± 0.002 (2.05 ± 0.05)

0.982 ± 0.010 (24.95 ± 0.30) 0.422 ± 0.004 (10.73 ± 0.08)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.11 (8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

2 2

18°

0.287 (7.30) Max.

2 2

Brass

0.622 ± 0.007 (15.80 ± 0.20)

1.082 ± 0.004 (26.10 ± 0.10)

0.422 ± 0.004 (10.73 ± 0.08)

0.888 ± 0.002 (22.55 ± 0.05)

0.327 (8.31) Nom.

1.070 (27.18) Max. 0.279 ± 0.004 (7.10 ± 0.10) Hole Ø0.098 (Ø2.50) Nom. 0.380 ± 0.002/0.003 (9.62 ± 0.07/0.08)

0.351 ± 0.010/0.11 (8.90 ± 0.25/0.26)

0.756 (19.20) Nom. Code “B” Alternative Solder Lug Only

2 V11-T2-52

0.876 ± 0.004 (22.25 ± 0.10)

0.909 ± 0.017 (23.09 ± 0.44) 1.075 ± 0.004 (27.30 ± 0.10)

Hole Ø0.106 (Ø2.70) Nom. 0.636 ± 0.030 (16.17 ± 0.755)

0.866 + 0.004/–0.008 (22.00 + 0.10/–0.20)

Panel Thickness 0.030–0.118 (0.75–3.00)

Panel Opening

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers 1600/2600—Midsize AC Only

2.6

Accessories

2

Panel Cutout Fillers If panel cutout fillers are required in anticipation of future rocker or paddle switch installation, order Catalog Number 1609DUM.

2

Specify color of base and filler portion by using the standard two-digit color code (base and lever) for non-illuminated switches.

2 2

Example: 1609DUM11

2

Legends

2

How To Order—Legends

2

To order a rocker with a legend marking, add the three-character code to the end of the catalog number. Example: 1500-21E becomes 1500-21E038. Legends are for 1500/2500 and 1600/2600 only.

2

Most Popular Legends 1 Legend

Code

Legend

014

Code

Legend

653

2

Code

2

735

2

I

0

ON

0

Legend

714

OFF

I

Code

0

2 023 POW

656

725

746

2

ER

I

2

0

038

657

730

ON

0

O FF

I

039

671

2

752

2 2 734

2

760

2

ON

OFF

0

2 630

2 2 2

Note 1 For additional legend options, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-53

2.7 2

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Contents

Rockette Series

Description

2

Page

Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated Standard Rockette Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches. . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2

V11-T2-55 V11-T2-56 V11-T2-57 V11-T2-58 V11-T2-58

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

These rocker switches offer the widest selection of features available, providing the design flexibility needed to fill the requirements of a variety of applications. They are available in two versions: standard and sealed.

Voltages ● 110 Vac neon ● 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc On the illuminated version, the lamp is wired to operate in conjunction with the switch on single-throw circuit; on double-throw circuits, the lamp is independent of the switch

Standard and Sealed ● Additional colors of rockers and bezels are available ● Hot stamped or pad printed legends on rocker and bezel ● Paddle actuators ● Single rocker operator on two- and three-pole circuits ● Dry circuits capabilities ● Special ratings ● Reversing jumpers ● Dead back cover (two-pole base) with wire leads ● Special circuits ● Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types ● Metal snap-in bezels ● Foam dust seal

The Sealed Rockette features a silicone rubber seal that protects contacts and mechanisms. All switches resist contaminants such as sand, dust and moisture with both a base-to-frame seal and an actuator seal. Nonilluminated and illuminated versions are available. For Sealed Rockette selection, see table on Page V11-T2-56.

2 2 2



Mounting Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting ●

● Snap-in Mounting Convenient front panel or sub-panel snap-in mounting

Available in single- and twopole non-illuminated or in single-pole illuminated Rockette switches. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for three- and four-pole circuits Unless otherwise noted, all switches with snap-in mounting are UL Recognized and CSA Certified

2

Sealed Only ● Special voltage bulbs ● Industry standard connector available ● Two-pole illuminated circuit

2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-54

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ● ● ●

UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2.7

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Standard Rockette Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Standard Rockette Switches Example:

Rating 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac

Poles and Throw 2PST

1000W, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

DOWN Position

ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON ON MOM. ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF

OFF ON ON MOM. ON ON OFF OFF ON ON MOM. ON ON

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

8150K21

C

2PST

ON ON ON

NONE OFF NONE

OFF ON ON

8155K21 8155K20 8155K22

C

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

8130K20

4PST

ON ON ON

NONE OFF NONE

OFF ON ON

8140K21 8140K20 8140K22

2PDT

2PDT

2PDT

4PDT

E

6

T

50

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Base Circuit Number 8132K21 8132K20 8132K22 8138K20 8138K30 8142K21 8147K21 8142K20 8142K22 8148K20 8148K30

2PST 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

8132K21

2 3

Circuit Number C

3 3

D

C

D

D 3

F E F

4

Mounting Frame 5 All Except 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 E = Mounting, 2-pole F = Mounting, 2-pole G = Mounting, 2-pole W = Snap-in X = Snap-in Y = Snap-in Z = Snap-in 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 H = Mounting, 4-pole

Rocker/Paddle Style All Except 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 6 = 2-pole 7 = 2-pole 20 = 2-pole 7 37 = 2-pole 8 8130K20, 8140K20, 8140K21, 8140K22 14 = 4-pole

2 Rocker/Paddle Color M = White T = Red V = Black

Terminal Type 50 = Screw 51 = Solder lugs 52 = 0.250 in spade

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

6

2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 These switches also have marked rating of 7A at 277 Vac and 3/4 hp at 277 Vac. 2 Add code letters and numbers for mounting frame, rocker style and color and terminal construction. 3 Also rated 2A, 277 Vac; 2.5A, L125 Vac. 4 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 5 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59. 6 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61. 7 Cannot be used with snap-in mounting bezel. 8 Recommended for use with snap-in mounting.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-55

2.7

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Sealed Rockette Switches

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Rating 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT 2PST

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON ON ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

Rating 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac

Poles and Throw 1PST 1PDT

ON MOM. ON

2 2

0.250 in Spade 8055K23 8055K20 8055K26 8055K29 8055K32 8055K43 8055K40 8055K46 8055K49 8055K52

Solder Lugs 8055K24 8055K21 8055K27 8055K30 8055K33 8055K44 8055K41 8055K47 8055K50 8055K53

Screw 8055K25 8055K22 8055K28 8055K31 8055K34 8055K45 8055K42 8055K48 8055K51 8055K54

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Circuit Number 1

A B C D

Mounting Frame E = Standard F = Standard L = Standard X = Snap-in W = Snap-in Z = Snap-in

2

Rocker Color M = White V = Black

Rocker Style 3 1 = Two-face serrated 2 = Three-face smooth 7 = Concave

NONE OFF

DOWN Position

OFF ON

8057K23

Base Circuit Number Terminal Type 0.250 in Spade 8057K23 8057K29

Circuit Solder Number 1 Screw Lugs 8057K24 8057K25 G 8057K30 8057K31 H

E 1

5

V

Mounting Frame E = Standard F = Standard L = Standard X = Snap-in W = Snap-in Z = Snap-in

Notes 1 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 2 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59. 3 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.

2 2 2 V11-T2-56

1

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. 2

Rocker Style 3 3 = Serrated w/1 lens 5 = Smooth w/1 lens 8 = Concave w/1 lens

2

2

Base Circuit Number Terminal Type

V

Bulb Voltage 1 = Neon 110V 3 = 14 Vdc filament 4 = 28 Vdc filament

2

2

OFF ON ON ON MOM. ON OFF ON ON ON MOM. ON

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

2

2

NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF

DOWN Position

Example:

2 2

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

E 2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Illuminated

2 2

8055K23

Example:

2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rocker Color M = White V = Black

Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = Red 4 = Amber 5 = Blue

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

2.7

8058 Series Sealed Rockette Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Sealed Rockette Switches, Non-Illuminated Example: Circuit with Rocker in …

Rating 30A, 125 Vac 25A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac

UP Position

Poles and Throw

8058K28

Z 7

DOWN Position

Terminal Type

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

Base Circuit Number

CENTER Position

2

V

0.250 in Spade

Solder Lugs

Screw

Circuit Number

1

2

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

N/A

N/A

8058K10

A

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K22

B

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K28

B

1PDT

MOM ON

OFF

ON

N/A

N/A

8058K31

B

1PDT

MOM ON

OFF

MOM ON

N/A

N/A

8058K34

B

3

Mounting Frame E = Standard ears up with two tapped holes F = Standard flat with two holes X = Metal snap-in Z = Standard plastic snap-in W = Contour plastic snap-in L = Standard ears up with two holes

2

Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black

2 2 2 2 2

4

Rocker Style 1 = Two-face serrated 2 = Three-face smooth 7 = Concave

2 2

8058K22E7V

8058K10X7T

8058K28Z7V

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Supplied with terminal screws, (Cat. No. 11-8616), unassembled. 2 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-78. 3 See Frame Styles on Page V11-T2-59. 4 See Rocker Styles on Page V11-T2-61.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-57

2.7 2 2 2 2

Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Technical Data and Specifications Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated Description

Specification

Description

Specification

Ratings and circuits Contact mechanism

See selection tables on Pages V11-T2-55 to V11-T2-57. Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc. Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications

1000W rated

Movable—Checon SK015B contact material welded to contactor Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button

Terminal types

Screw terminals—Brass designed to accept #6-32 x 3/16 binding head screws (Cat. No. 811-2), furnished unassembled Solder lug—0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade

Termination material

Screw and spade—Brass Solder— Tintillate-plated brass

Lamp voltages

110 Vac neon 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc

Mounting

Flush (two screws), sub-panel and snap-in mounting

2

Contact material 3–6A rated

2

10–15A rated

2

Rockers

20A rated

2

Movable—Silver-plated copper Stationary—Silver-plated copper Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Movable—Silver-plated copper with cad-oxide contact face button Stationary—Copper with cad-oxide contact face button

2

Dimensions

2

Base Standard Rockette Switch Dimensions

Snap-In Mounting Dimensions

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Terminals

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Type W Type X

2 2 2

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screw

0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole 0.040 (1.02)

2

0.188 (4.78)

2

Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped

2

0.288 (7.32)

Contoured Snap-In Bezel, Two-Pole Base

0.040 (1.02)

Snap-In Bezel, Single-, Twoand Four-Pole Bases

1.550 ± 0.010 (39.37 ± 0.254)

2.06 (52.32)

Screw Terminal

1.12 (28.44)

2

0.900 ± 0.010 (22.86 ± 0.254)

2

Type Y

Type Z

2

Sub-Panel Snap-In Mounting Bezel, Single- and Two-Pole Bases

Snap-In Mounting Bezel, Two-Pole Base Only

1.94 (49.27)

1.700 (43.18)

2 2 2 2 2

0.960 (24.38)

Panel Opening

2

125°C Approx.

2

1.450 1.190 (36.83) (30.23)

2 0.680 (17.27)

2

0.830 (21.08)

2

Panel Thickness 0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)

2 V11-T2-58

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.7

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Frame Types and Rocker/Paddle Styles for Standing Switches—Non-Illuminated Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types

2

Type E

Type F

Style 37 with Type X

1.940 (49.28)

2.500 (63.50)

1.620 (41.15)

2.250 (57.15) CC

0.380 (9.65)

2

0.100 (2.54)

CC

0.380 (9.65)

0.850 ± 0.030 (21.59 ± 0.76)

2

0.380 ± 0.030 (9.65 ± 0.76)

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

2

17.5° 0.200 (5.08)

2

0.640 ± 0.254 (16.26 ± 6.45)

Type G

2

2.120 (53.85) 1.750 (44.45)

2

CC

0.380 (9.65)

2

Mounting Type Recommended with This Style 0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

2

Two-Pole Rocker Styles Style 6

Style 7

0.650 (16.51)

17.5°

0.650 (16.51) R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

0.660 (16.76)

CC

CC

Four-Pole Mounting Frame Type Type H

2

R 0.100 (R 2.54)

2

0.830 (21.08) 0.100 (2.54)

0.880 (22.35)

0.580 (14.73)

2

Style 20

2

CC

2 2

Four-Pole Rocker Styles Style 14

1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15)

1.300 (33.02)

2 R 0.610 (R 15.49)

2

CC

2

CC

2

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

2 2

Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Bottom of Terminal Dimension in Inches (mm)

Dimension in Inches (mm)

Mounting Frame Type

Mounting Frame Type

Two-Pole

Four-Pole

2

Rocker Style Type E

Type F

Type G

Recommended Panel Opening

Rocker Style Type H

Recommended Panel Opening

2

6

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

14

1.34 x 1.25 (34.04 x 31.75)

7

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2

20

N/A

0.42 (10.67)

0.42 (10.67)

N/A

37

N/A

N/A

N/A

N/A

0.08 (2.03)

2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-59

2.7 2 2 2 2

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Base Sealed Rockette Switch Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type E—Rocker Style 1 17.5˚

1.940 (49.28) 0.080 (2.03)

1.620 (41.15)

2

Quick Connect Term.

0.648 (16.46)

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screws 6-32 Tap

0.250 (6.35)

0.750 (19.05)

0.031 (0.79) Ref.

0.288 0.040 (7.32) (1.02) Screw Terminal

1.330 (33.83)

2 2

Sealed Two-Pole—Mounting Frame Type F—Rocker Style 1

2

R 1.135 (R 28.83)

2 2

Panel Opening

35˚ 17.5˚

2.500 (63.50) R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.722 (18.34)

0.453 (11.51)

0.032 (0.81) 0.031/0.033 (0.79/0.84)

0.250 (6.35)

0.062 (1.57)

2.250 (57.15)

2 Mtg. Holes 0.172 (4.37) Dia.

2.020 (51.31) 0.260 (6.60)

2

BB

1.062 (26.97)

2

0.031 (0.79)

0.250 (6.35)

Type X

Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped

0.390 (9.91)

#6-32 x 0.188 (4.78) Lg. Binding Head Term. Screws

0.031 (0.79) Ref. 0.040 0.288 (1.02) (7.32) Screw Terminal

Type Z 1.550 ± 0.010 (39.37 ± 0.254) 1.700 (43.18)

2

0.960 (24.38)

0.900 ± 0.010 (22.86 ± 0.254)

Snap-In Mounting Bezel

Snap-In Bezel

2

Reference Dimensions “AA” and “BB” in Inches (mm) 1 Terminal Type

Dimension “AA” (Two-Pole) E Frame

F Frame

L Frame

Dimension “BB” W Frame

X Frame

Z Frame

All Frames

Screw

1.39 (35.33)

1.05 (26.62)

1.39 (35.33) 1.37 (34.82)

1.39 (35.34) 1.37 (34.82)

0.30 (7.62)

Solder lug

1.36 (34.57)

1.02 (25.86)

1.36 (34.57) 1.34 (34.06)

1.36 (34.51) 1.34 (34.06)

0.27 (6.86)

0.250 in spade 1.53 (38.89)

1.19 (30.18)

1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)

1.53 (38.89) 1.51 (38.38)

0.44 (11.18)

8058 Screw 2 1.509 (38.33) 1.145 (29.08) 1.509 (38.33) 1.808 (45.92) 1.627 (41.33) 1.528 (38.81)

0.460 (11.68)

Notes 1 Dimension “AA”—Top of frame to bottom of terminal; “BB”—from bottom of base to bottom of terminal. 2 #8-32 x 1/4 Phillips screw.

2 V11-T2-60

0.040 (1.02)

0.188 (4.78)

1.620 (41.15)

2 2

1.090 (27.69)

0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole 0.280 (7.11)

0.750 (19.05)

2 2

Terminals 0.648 (16.46)

35˚

0.960 AA (24.38)

2

Panel Thickness 0.040–0.140 (1.02–3.56)

1.330 (33.83)

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Sealed Two-Pole Switch—Mounting Frame Type W—Rocker Stye 7

2

0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.80)

0.750 (19.05)

2 2

0.648 (16.48)

0.294 (7.47)

Snap-in Mounting Frame Dimensions

0.126 (3.20)

1.190 (30.23) 1.450 (36.83)

0.094 (2.39)

AA

BB

0.032 (0.81) Ref.

125°C Approx.

Max. 0.812 (20.62)

2 2

0.040 (1.02) Solder Lug Terminal Hot Tin Dipped

0.380 (9.65)

BB

2

2

0.188 (4.78)

0.094 (2.39)

0.062 (1.57)

AA

0.032 (0.81)

2

0.125 (3.18) Dia. Hole

Max. 0.812 (20.62)

0.380 (9.65)

2

2

Terminals

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.7

Rockers Rockette—General Purpose AC Rated

Dimensions for Frame Type and Rocker Styles—Sealed Switches

2

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated

Illuminated

2

Single- and Two-Pole Mounting Frame Types

Single-Pole Mounting Frame Types

Type E

Type E

2

1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15)

0.380 (9.65)

1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15)

CC

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

2

0.380 (9.65)

2

CC

2

#6-32 Tap 2 Holes

Type F

2

Type F

2.500 (63.50)

2.500 (63.50)

0.380 (9.65)

2.250 (57.15)

2

0.380 (9.65)

2.250 (57.15)

CC

2

CC

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

2

0.150 (3.81) Dia. 2 Holes

Type L

Type L

1.940 (49.28)

2

1.940 (49.28) 1.620 (41.15)

CC

1.620 (41.15)

0.380 (9.65) 0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole

0.162 (4.11) Dia. 2 Hole

2

0.380 (9.65)

Single- and Two-Pole Rocker Styles

Single-Pole Rocker Styles

Style 1

Style 3

2 2 2

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.650 (16.51)

2

CC

0.650 (16.51)

CC 0.216 (5.49)

Style 2

2

CC

0.360 (9.14)

2

Style 5

2

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

R 0.610 (R 15.49) 0.650 (16.51)

0.650 (16.51)

CC

0.216 (5.49)

Style 7

2

CC

0.360 (9.14)

2

Style 8 R 1.135 (R 28.83) 0.650 (16.51)

R 0.610 (R 15.49)

0.350 (8.89) 0.650 0.496 R 0.610 (16.51) (12.60) (R 15.49)

CC

2

R 1.135 (R 28.83)

2

CC

2 2

Reference Dimension “CC”—Top of Frame to Rocker Face Dimension in Inches (mm)

2

Dimension in Inches (mm)

Mounting Frame Type

Mounting Frame Type

Rocker Single- and Two-Pole (Non-Illuminated) Style E Frame F Frame L Frame

Recommended Panel Opening

Rocker Style

Single- and Two-Pole (Illuminated) E Frame

F Frame

L Frame

Recommended Panel Opening

1

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

3

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

5

0.08 (2.03)

0.42 (10.67)

0.08 (2.03)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

7

0.11 (2.79)

0.45 (11.43)

0.11 (2.79)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

8

0.11 (2.79)

0.45 (11.43)

0.11 (2.79)

0.69 x 1.25 (17.53 x 31.75)

2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-61

2.8 2

Rockers 8006/8007—EURO SR

Contents

8006/8007 Series

Description

2

Page

8006/8007—EURO SR Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2

V11-T2-63 V11-T2-64 V11-T2-64

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Field-proven in America’s roughest off-road applications, the standard size EURO SR is one tough and reliable rocker switch. Available with the complete range of rugged single- and two-pole, illuminated or non-illuminated circuits.

Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications.

Additional colors of rockers and bezels are available ● Special circuits ● Special ratings ● Pad-printed legends on rocker and bezel ● Special voltage bulbs ● Dry circuit capabilities ● Foam dust seal ● Reversing jumpers ● Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types ● Wire leads ● Dead back cover ● Palm guard ● Industry standard connector: 28-3426 ● EURO SR panel plug: 53-3318 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

The EURO SR Series offers snap-in mounting and can be provided with a durable silicone seal that resists dust and moisture. All EURO SR switches are molded in an aesthetically pleasing matte finish and operate with a crisp tactile feel, allowing for easy actuation. The EURO SR will accept loads up to 15A. Terminal numbers are stamped on base for easy identification.

2



Rocker Material Thermoplastic rocker actuators. Different colors are available. Rocker and bezel are a high-grade nylon supplied with matte finish. ●

● Lamps Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc, 18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon and 250 Vac neon—are offered as standard. For additional lamp voltages, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. ● Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel.

Seal Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed devices are furnished with silicone rubber seal, providing moisture and dust resistance with an IP67 rating. ●

2 2 2



Lens Options ●

Lens Part Numbers (if ordered separately) Green . . . . . . . . . . 28-5415 Amber . . . . . . . .28-5415-2 Red. . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . .28-5415-4 White . . . . . . . . .28-5415-5

2 2 2 V11-T2-62

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ●



UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2.8

Rockers 8006/8007—EURO SR

EURO SR Standard Size Euro-Style Rocker Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—EURO SR, Non-Illuminated Example:

Rating

Poles and Throw 1PST

1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2PST

2PDT 2PDT 2 2PDT 3

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

2-3 2-3 1 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 5-6

8006K23

N

NONE

OFF

OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE

2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 OFF

OFF NONE OFF OFF 5-6 5-3

2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 OFF 5-1

0.250 in Spade 8006K23 8006K35 8006K20 8006K26 8006K29 8006K32 8006K43 8006K55 8006K40 8006K46 8006K49 8006K52 8006K58 8006K61

Solder Lugs 8006K24 8006K36 8006K21 8006K27 8006K30 8006K33 8006K44 8006K56 8006K41 8006K47 8006K50 8006K53 8006K59 8006K62

T

2

1

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type DOWN Position

1

Mounting Frame Color /Style N = Black/standard T = Black/top half palm guard B = Black/bottom half palm guard

Screw 8006K25 8006K37 8006K22 8006K28 8006K31 8006K34 8006K45 8006K57 8006K42 8006K48 8006K51 8006K54 8006K60 8006K63

Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black

Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed

Rocker Style 1 = Two-face

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

How To Order—EURO SR, Illuminated Example:

Rating

Poles and Throw 1PST

1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2PST 2PDT 45

4

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

OFF NONE 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 OFF 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1

NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF

8007K23

N

2-1 2-11 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 2-1, 5-4 NONE 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1

0.250 in Spade 8007K23 8007K35 8007K20 8007K26 8007K29 8007K32 8007K43 8007K55 8007K40 8007K46 8007K49 8007K52

Solder Lugs 8007K24 8007K36 8007K21 8007K27 8007K30 8007K33 8007K44 8007K56 8007K41 8007K47 8007K50 8007K53

1

3 T

2

2

1

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type DOWN Position

4

Screw 8007K25 8007K37 8007K22 8007K28 8007K31 8007K34 8007K45 8007K57 8007K42 8007K48 8007K51 8007K54

Mounting Frame Color /Style N = Black/standard T = Black/top half palm guard B = Black/bottom half palm guard Bulb Voltage 1 = 125V neon 7 2 = 250V neon 7 3 = 14 Vdc 8 4 = 28 Vdc 8 7 = 18 Vdc 8

Lamp Wiring 1 = Dependent 2 = Independent Rocker Style 3 = Two-face w/1 lens 6 4 = Two-face w/2 lenses 4 Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black

2 Lens Color 1 = White 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Amber 5 = No lens 6 = Blue 7 = Clear

Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed

Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 3A at 250 Vac, 6A at 125 Vac. 3 1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac. 4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp centered in open-pole of base. 5 Not standard with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4. 6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4 for all double-throw switches. 7 Available on single-pole versions only. 8 14 Vdc, 18 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-63

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

2.8 2 2 2

Rockers 8006/8007—EURO SR

Technical Data and Specifications 8006/8007—EURO SR Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac 10A at 250 Vac 3/4 hp at 250 Vac (hp rating does not apply to lighted switches) Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT Maintained and momentary action Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum 25,000 operations minimum at full load Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) Spade—Brass Screw—Brass (terminal screws provided unassembled) Solder—Tintillate-plated brass Thermoset molding material Thermoplastic rocker actuators 1000V rms, minimum IP67 (with optional seal) Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel –40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Circuits Mechanical life Electrical life Terminal types

Base material Rocker material Dielectric Seal level Mounting means Operating temperature

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated

2

Illuminated 1.705 ± 0.011 (43.31 ± 0.31)

R 0.156 ± 0.010 (R 3.96 ± 0.25)

2

Palm Guard

2 2

2

1.427 + 0.020/– 0.012 (36.25 + 0.51/– 0.38) 1 2 3

1.450 (36.85) 1.190 (30.23)

2

2

0.250 ± 0.004 (6.35 ± 0.08) 0.030 (0.813) Thick

0.440 ± 0.005 (11.18 ± 0.13)

2

0.830 (21.08)

4 0.680 (17.27)

0.389 ±0.040 (9.88 ±1.02)

0.096 ±0.010 (2.44 ±0.25)

1.082 ± 0.012 (27.48 ± 0.30)

2

2

R 0.156 ±0.005 (3.97 ±0.13)

0.096 ± 0.010 (2.44 ± 0.25)

2

2

0.957 ± 0.012 (24.31 ± 0.30)

0.389 ± 0.041 (9.88 ± 1.06)

2

2

1.705 ± 0.011 (43.31 ± 0.31)

0.957 ± 0.012 (24.31 ± 0.30)

2

2

R 0.156 ± 0.010 (R 3.96 ± 0.25)

5

1.705 ±0.012 (43.31 ±0.30)

1.220 ±0.012 (30.99 ±0.30)

6

0.820 ± 0.005 (20.83 ± 0.13)

Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.040 to 0.140 (1.02 to 3.56) Best Results Obtained from: 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.18)

2 V11-T2-64

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers 8004/8005—Euro Full Size

2.9

Contents

8004/8005–Euro Full Size

Description

Page

8004/8005—Euro Full Size Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T2-66 V11-T2-67 V11-T2-67

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Eaton’s 8004 and 8005 EuroLook Series features matte finish European styling and snap-in mounting. These durable switches, field-tested in the most demanding truck and marine applications, are available with a variety of standard actuator options. Options include concave, two-face, illuminated, nonilluminated and the recessed feature, which allows placement of your label on the face of our rocker. All switches in this rugged lineup can be fitted with a silicone rubber seal to provide moisture and dust-resistance. Additionally, these switches can be gang-mounted into a single panel opening. Panel blanks are also available.

● Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications.

Additional colors of rockers and mounting bezels are available ● Special circuits ● Special ratings ● Gold contacts ● Dry circuit capabilities ● Pad-printed legends on rocker and bezel ● Special lamp voltages ● Foam dust seal ● Reversing jumpers ● Printed circuit terminals and other terminal types ● Dead back cover (two-pole base) with wire leads ● Matching indicators ● Industry standard connector: 28-3426 ● Full size Euro-Look gang mounting systems ● Full size Euro-Look panel plugs: 17-19544-2 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

Rocker Material Custom styled, multi-colored thermoplastic rocker actuators. The rocker and bezel are supplied with a matte finish. ●

Lamps Five lamp voltages—14 Vdc, 18 Vdc, 28 Vdc, 125 Vac neon and 250 Vac neon—are offered as standard. For additional lamp voltages, please contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. ●

Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. ●

● Seal Available in sealed and nonsealed versions. Sealed devices are furnished with a silicone rubber seal providing moisture and dust resistance with an IP54 rating.



2 Lens Options ●

Lens Part Numbers (if ordered separately) 8005 Two-Face Green . . . . . . . . . 28-3425 Amber . . . . . . . . 28-3425-2 Red . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-3425-4 White . . . . . . . . 28-3425-5 8005 Concave Red . . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148 Green . . . . . . . . 28-5148-2 Amber . . . . . . . . 28-5148-3 Blue . . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-4 Clear . . . . . . . . . 28-5148-5

Standards and Certifications ●



2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1

2 2 2

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-65

2.9

Rockers 8004/8005—Euro Full Size

Full Size, Euro-Look Rocker Switches

2

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—Full Size Euro, Non-Illuminated Example:

2 2 2

Rating

Poles and Throw

2

1PST

2

1PDT

2 2

10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2PDT

2

2PDT 2 2PDT 3

2 2

2PST

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

2-3 2-3 1 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 5-6

OFF

OFF NONE OFF OFF

2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1

NONE

OFF

OFF NONE OFF OFF 5-6 5-3

2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1 OFF 5-1

Example:

Rating

2 2

0.250 in Spade 8004K23 8004K35 8004K20 8004K26 8004K29 8004K32 8004K43 8004K55 8004K40 8004K46 8004K49 8004K52 8004K58 8004K61

Solder Lugs 8004K24 8004K36 8004K21 8004K27 8004K30 8004K33 8004K44 8004K56 8004K41 8004K47 8004K50 8004K53 8004K59 8004K62

1

Poles and Throw 1PST

1PDT 10A, 250 Vac 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2

2PST 2PDT

2

2 2 2 2

1

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Mounting Frame Color N = Black M = White T = Red G = Gray

Screw 8004K25 8004K37 8004K22 8004K28 8004K31 8004K34 8004K45 8004K57 8004K42 8004K48 8004K51 8004K54 8004K60 8004K63

Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black G = Gray

Rocker Style 0 = Recessed 1 = Two-face 6 = Paddle 7 = Concave

45

4

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

OFF NONE 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 OFF 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1

NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE OFF OFF

8005K23

N

Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed

2-1 2-1 1 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 2-1, 5-4 NONE 2-1, 5-4 2-3, 5-6 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 1

0.250 in Spade 8005K23 8005K35 8005K20 8005K26 8005K29 8005K32 8005K43 8005K55 8005K40 8005K46 8005K49 8005K52

Solder Lugs 8005K24 8005K36 8005K21 8005K27 8005K30 8005K33 8005K44 8005K56 8005K41 8005K47 8005K50 8005K53

1

3 T

2

1

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number.

Terminal Type DOWN Position

4

Screw 8005K25 8005K37 8005K22 8005K28 8005K31 8005K34 8005K45 8005K57 8005K42 8005K48 8005K51 8005K54

Mounting Frame Color N = Black M = White T = Red G = Gray Bulb Voltage 1 = 125V neon 7 2 = 250V neon 7 3 = 14 Vdc 8 4 = 28 Vdc 8 7 = 18 Vdc 8

2 2

T

How To Order—Full Size Euro, Illuminated

2

2

N

Terminal Type DOWN Position

NONE

2 2

8004K23

Lamp Wiring 1 = Dependent 2 = Independent Rocker Style 2 = Recessed w/1 lens 6 3 = Two-face w/1 lens 6 4 = Two-face w/2 lenses 4 5 = Recessed w/2 lenses 4 8 = Concave w/1 lens 6 9 = Concave w/2 lenses 4

Rocker Color M = White T = Red V = Black G = Gray Lens Color 2 = Red 3 = Green 4 = Amber 5 = No lens 6 = Blue Seal Option 1 = Non-sealed 2 = Sealed

Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 3A at 250 Vac, 5A at 125 Vac. 3 1/4 hp at 125–250 Vac. 4 All double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT, provided with two lamps and two lenses (Rocker Style 4). When lamp is wired independent of circuit for 1PDT switches, device is supplied with lamp centered in open-pole of base. 5 Not standard available with lamp wired independent of circuit. All 2PDT switches must be dependent on circuit and use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9. 6 Not provided standard for double-throw circuits, both 1PDT and 2PDT. Must use Rocker Style 4, 5 or 9 for all double-throw switches. 7 Available on single-pole versions only. 8 14 Vdc and 28 Vdc bulbs are not UL, CSA when bulb is wired dependent to switch circuit.

V11-T2-66

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.9

Rockers 8004/8005—Euro Full Size

Technical Data and Specifications

2

8004/8005—Euro Full Size

2

Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac (hp rating does not apply to lighted switches) Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT; Maintained and momentary action Movable—Silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary—Copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum 25,000 operations minimum at full load Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade—Brass Screw—Brass #6-32 x 3/16 (terminal screws provided unassembled) Solder—Tintillate-plated brass; tintillate spade terminals Thermoset molding material 1000V rms, minimum IP54 (with optional seal) Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Circuits Contact material Mechanical life Electrical life Terminal types

Base material Dielectric Seal level Mounting means

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Non-Illuminated

2

Illuminated 1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

2

1.970 ± 0.010 (50.04 ± 0.25)

R 0.004 ± 0.005 (R 0.125 ± 0.13)

1.440 ± 0.010 (36.58 ± 0.25) R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.

0.519 ± 0.005 (13.18 ± 0.13)

R 0.004 ± 0.005 (R 0.125 ± 0.13)

1.440 ± 0.010 (36.58 ± 0.25) R 0.156 (R 3.96) Typ.

0.519 ± 0.005 (13.18 ± 0.13)

2 2 2

Surface Length Along Bottom of Recess: 1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)

1.087 ± 0.005 (27.61 ± 0.13)

0.090 ± 0.005 (2.29 ± 0.13)

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.01 ± 0.25) 0.689 ± 0.010 (17.50 ± 0.25)

Surface Length Along Bottom of Recess: 1.122 ± 0.012 (28.50 ± 0.31)

1.087 ± 0.005 (27.61 ± 0.13)

0.090 ± 0.005 (2.29 ± 0.13)

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

0.080 (2.03)

0.080 (2.03) 0.395 ± 0.029 (10.03 ± 0.76)

0.440 ± 0.010 (11.18 ± 0.25)

1.602 ± 0.029 (40.69 ± 0.76)

0.031 (0.79) 0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81) 0.001 (0.032) Thick 1

1

1.734 ± 0.005 (44.04 ± 0.13)

Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)

0.328 ± 0.015 (8.33 ± 0.38)

2 3

1.734 ± 0.005 (44.04 ± 0.13)

4

5

6 0.687 ± 0.015 (17.45 ± 0.38)

0.867 ± 0.005 (22.02 ± 0.13)

4

5

2 2 2 2 2

0.031 (0.79) 0.250 ± 0.032 (6.35 ± 0.81) 0.001 (0.032) Thick

0.328 ± 0.015 (8.33 ± 0.38)

2 3

0.440 ± 0.010 (11.18 ± 0.25)

1.602 ± 0.029 (40.69 ± 0.76)

2 2

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

0.395 ± 0.029 (10.03 ± 0.76)

0.867 ± 0.005 (22.02 ± 0.13)

1.024 ± 0.010 (26.01 ± 0.25) 0.689 ± 0.010 (17.50 ± 0.25)

2 2 2

6 0.687 ± 0.015 (17.45 ± 0.38)

2

Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.130 (2.03 to 3.30)

2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-67

2.10 2

Rockers X Series Rockers

Contents

X Series Rockers—XR

Description

2

Page

X Series Rockers Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . X Series Symbols Library . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Light Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2 2

V11-T2-69 V11-T2-70 V11-T2-70 V11-T2-70 V11-T2-71

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description The Electrical Sector is pleased to offer X Series Rockers for use in outdoor applications to meet almost every market need. These sleek style rockers are molded in a unique smooth matte finish. The bezel is also unique with a more modern roundedrectangular design with an oval shaped rocker. X Series Rockers are available in single- and double-pole with various circuit options, LED illumination, and laser etching. ● Frames and actuator colors are black ● Switches provided with 0.025 spade quick connect terminals

Application Description

Features and Benefits

Options

Market Applications

Seal Standard IP56 Sealing per IES 60529.



● ● ● ● ● ●



Agriculture Bus Commercial Marine Specialty Vehicle Truck

Illumination Standard LED voltages offered include 14 Vdc and 125 Vac. ●

Material Frames are nylon and actuators are nylon with glass fiber with both meeting UL flame: 94HB. Terminals are silver plated brass.





Panel plug: 53-3318 Industry standard connector: 28-3426 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.



● Mounting Means Easy snap-in mounting with plastic bezel.

Standards and Certifications ●

● ●

UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada File E2702 T85 RoHS Compliant

● Label Eaton part number etched on switch for easy inventory management.

Product Selection Guide Seal

Actuator

Decorative

Termination

Illumination

Top



Rocker without bezel



Laser-etch



Spade



Incandescent 6 Vdc



Neon 110V



Bottom



Rocker with bezel



Pad-print



Solder



Incandescent 12 Vdc



Neon 125V



Panel



Paddle



Screw



Incandescent 14 Vdc



Neon 250V



2

Snap-in lens



Poles

Weld lugs



Incandescent 18 Vdc



14 Vdc LED



Locking



Single



Incandescent 24 Vdc



28 Vdc LED



2

Label



Double



Incandescent 28 Vdc



125 Vac LED



Four



277 Vac LED



2

2 2 V11-T2-68

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.10

Rockers X Series Rockers

X Series Rockers

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

Standard rating 16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V Also recommended for use in applications up to 21A 14 Vdc IP56 per IES 60529

2 2

Product Selection XR Series Rocker

2

X Series Rockers Lamp Voltage

Switch Function

Light Circuit 3

Lens Color T. 1-4

None

SPST OFF-ON

X = None

None

SPST OFF-ON

X = None

SPST OFF-ON

E=

SPST OFF-ON

14 Vdc LED

None

125 Vac LED 1

T. 3-6

Switch Markings

Catalog Number

None

Int’l ON/OFF 4

XRXAXXXNV1CU

None

None

ON/OFF 4

XRXAXXXNV1DB

None

Amber

None

XR1AEX4NV1XX

E=

None

Green

None

XR1AEX3NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Red

None

XR1AEX2NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1CG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR1CG33NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1BG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR1BG33NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR1EG44NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Green

Green

None

2

X = None

None

None

Int’l ON/OFF

DPST OFF-ON 2

X = None

None

None

ON/OFF 4

XRXMXXXNV1DB

DPST OFF-ON

X = None

None

None

None

XRXMXXXNV1XX

DPST ON-ON

X = None

None

None

None

XRXNXXXNV1XX

DPST OFF-ON

2 2 2 2 2 2

XR1EG33NV1XX 4

2

XRXMXXXNV1CU

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Amber

None

XR3AEX4NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Green

None

XR3AEX3NV1XX

SPST OFF-ON

E=

None

Red

None

XR3AEX2NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3CG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3CG33NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3BG44NV1XX

SPDT ON-OFF-ON

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3BG33NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Amber

Amber

None

XR3EG44NV1XX

SPDT (ON)-OFF-(ON)

G=

Green

Green

None

XR3EG33NV1XX

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Available in AC applications only. 2 Double-pole not available illuminated; it is available laser etched. 3 See Circuit Diagrams on Page V11-T2-70. 4 See Symbols Library on Page V11-T2-70.

2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-69

2.10 2 2

Rockers X Series Rockers

X Series Symbols Library Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

CU

2

DB

2 2 2 2

Technical Data and Specifications X Series Description

Specification

2

Ratings

16A 125V, 10A 277V, 3/4 hp 277V; recommended 21A 14 Vdc or 10A 28 Vdc

2

Operating temperature

–4° to 176°F (–20° to 80°C)

2

Light Diagrams

2

X Series

2

Light Circuit Letter

Functions

Light Circuit Letter

Functions

Light Circuit Letter

Functions

2

X

All

E

SPST

G

SPDT

2 2

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

1

4

5

2

5

3

6

1

2 3

5 6

2 3

5 6

2

5 2

3

6

2 3

5 6

2 2 3

6

Jumpers (3–4)

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-70

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers X Series Rockers

2.10

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Mounting Hole

2 2

Y

2

X

2

Dimensions

2

Thickness

0.03–0.12 (0.75–3.0)

X

0.83 +0.01 (21.2 +0.1)

2

Y

1.46 + 0.01 (37.0 +0.1)

2 2

X Series LED 1

2

LED 2

2 0.98 (25.0)

2 2 2

1.81 (46.0) ON

OFF

ON

0.32 (8.0)

2 2

0.09 (2.2) 1.11 (28.2)

2 2 2

0.25 (6.4)

0.44 (11.2)

2

0.81 (20.7)

2

1.43 (36.2)

2 2

0.81 (20.7)

2 2

0.03 (0.8)

2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-71

2.11 2

Rockers 8064/8065—ESPORT

Contents

8064/8065 Series

Description

2

Page

8064/8065—ESPORT Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Icon/Legend Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2 2

V11-T2-73 V11-T2-74 V11-T2-74 V11-T2-75

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Product Description

Features and Benefits

The ergonomically designed ESPORT Series comes with a large, independent LEDilluminated indicator window that clearly identifies the switch’s labeled function— your label or ours. The switch can be ordered with an LED illuminated actuator, as well. All ESPORT switches are molded in a clean matte finish and operate with a definite tactile feel. Actuation of the switch feels crisp. Also, ESPORT switches will accept loads up to15A. Due to the LED’s long life, lamp replacement should not be necessary.

Contact Mechanism Slow-make/slow-break contact mechanism. Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications.

Tested in America’s toughest truck applications, the ESPORT switch is reliable and durable and is available with a full range of rugged single- and two-pole circuits. It has an optional polarized lock-on connector. Spade switch terminals are tinplated for long storage life.



Rocker Material Thermoplastic rocker actuators. Different colors are available. The rocker and the bezel are a high-grade nylon and are supplied with an aesthetically pleasing matte finish. ●

Lamps Durable, long-life LED illumination; 14 Vdc is standard. Integral indicator is illuminated by two independent green, yellow or red LEDs while the actuator is lighted using one dependent LED. For additional LED voltages and/ or colors, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. ●

Options Lenses All switches can be ordered with either a frosted clear lens (Cat. No. 28-5555) or a translucent white lens (Cat. No. 28-5555-2). The clear lens will allow the maximum amount of diffused light to flow through your label or one of ours. The white lens is shipped unassembled to facilitate the addition of your engraved or pad-printed legend. ●

● Labels The lens area of the integral indicator will accept a label 0.750 x 0.450 and 0.010 in (19.05 x 11.43 x 0.25 mm) thick. Our selection of standard labels with white legends on black polycarbonate background can be found on Page V11-T2-74.

Mounting Means Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel. ●

2 2

Additional colors of rockers and mounting bezels are available ● Special circuits ● Special ratings ● Dry circuit capabilities ● Pad-printed legends on lens, rocker and bezel ● Special indicator legend labels ● Special LEDs and LED voltages ● Special actuators ● Reversing jumpers ● Solder terminals and other terminal types ● Wire leads ● Polarized lock-on connector: 28-5558 ● Full-size Euro-Look panel plugs: 17-19544-2 For information on optional features, contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. ●

Standards and Certifications ●



UL Recognized and recognized component for Canada: File 2702 RoHS Compliant 1

2 2

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

2 V11-T2-72

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.11

Rockers 8064/8065—ESPORT

ESPORT Full-Size Rocker Switches To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate base circuit number and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

2 2 2 2 2

Catalog Number Selection

2

How To Order—ESPORT, Non-Illuminated Example:

Rating

Poles and Throw 1PST

1PDT 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2PST

2PDT

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

5-6 OFF 2-3 2-3 2-3 1 2-3 1 2-3, 5-6 OFF 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 2-3, 5-6 1 2-3, 5-6 1

NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF NONE NONE OFF NONE OFF OFF

8064K10

DOWN Position

OFF 5-4 2-1 2-1 2-1 2-1 1 OFF 2-1, 5-4 1 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4 2-1, 5-4

Base Circuit Number 8064K10 8064K11 8064K14 8064K12 8064K17 8064K16 8064K20 8064K21 8064K24 8064K22 8064K27 8064K26

L

R

Z

1 W

2

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Rocker Style S = 1 in paddle L = 1.5 in paddle B = Rocker

2

Rocker LED Color Z = None

Rocker Color B = Black W = White R = Red G = Gray

LED Voltage 1 = 14 Vdc 2 = 28 Vdc

Indicator LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green

Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = White 2

1PST

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

5-6

NONE

2 2 2 2

Example:

Rating 15A, 125 Vac 15A, 28 Vdc

2

2

How To Order—ESPORT, Illuminated

Poles and Throw

2

8065K10

DOWN Position

OFF

Base Circuit Number 8065K10

S

R

Y

1 W

2

2

2

Code letters and/or numbers. Add to base circuit number. Rocker Style B = Rocker S = 1 in paddle

Indicator LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green

Rocker LED Color R = Red Y = Yellow G = Green

Rocker Color B = Black W = White R = Red G = Gray

LED Voltage 1 = 14 Vdc 2 = 28 Vdc

Lens Color 1 = Clear 2 = White 2

2 2 2 2 2 2

Notes 1 Momentary contact. 2 White lenses are furnished unassembled.

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-73

2.11 2 2 2 2

8064/8065—ESPORT Description

Specification

Ratings

15A at 125 Vac; 10A at 250 Vac; 3/4 hp at 250 Vac Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc 1PST, 1PDT, 2PST and 2PDT Maintained and momentary action Movable—Silver-plated copper with silver contact face button Stationary—Copper with silver contact face button Maintained—100,000 operations, minimum Momentary—25,000 operations, minimum Switch—Standard 0.250 in (6.35 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass Integral indicator—0.110 x 0.032 in (2.79 x 0.813 mm) spade, tintillate-plated brass Thermoset molding material 1000V rms, minimum Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Circuits Contact material Mechanical life

2

Terminal types

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

8064/8065—ESPORT

Technical Data and Specifications

2 2

Rockers

Base material Dielectric Mounting means

Icon/Legend Selection ● ● ●

All labels below come with adhesive backing Label legends are distinct and easily readable when illuminated from behind Additional labels are available upon request. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative

Icons and Legends Legend

Ordering Code 1

Style

Dome Light Work Light

0055 0056

TV/VCR

0065

Fridge

0066

Cruise ON/OFF Brake Select Brake ON/OFF Fan Override Cruise Set Engine Brake Left Window Power Mirror Right Window

0067

Icon

Description

Ordering Code 1

Windshield Wiper SAE Specification No. J1362-0086 White graphic on a black background

0057

Windshield Washer SAE Specification No. J1362-0087 White graphic on a black background

0986

Master Lighting Switch SAE Specification No. J1362-5012 White graphic on a black background

0687

Fog Lights SAE Specification No. J1362-0633 White graphic on a black background

0684

Clearance/Position Light SAE Specification No. J1362-0456 White graphics on a black background

0686

0068 Helvetica Narrow 0.135 in (3.43 mm) high White translucent letters Opaque black background

0069 0071 0681 0682 0683 0688 0689

Note 1 Ordering Code: If a standard label is required, add the Ordering Code to the end of ESPORT Switch part number preceded by a dash. Example: To order 8065K10BYR1B1 with the 0684 Fog Lights label, the part number will be 8065K10BYR1B1-0684.

2 2 2 2 2 V11-T2-74

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.11

Rockers 8064/8065—ESPORT

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Non-Illuminated and Illuminated

2 2

0.434 ± 0.029 (11.02 ± 0.76)

2 3

2

1

+7

USA

6

5

4

1.598 ± 0.029 (40.59 ± 0.76)

-8

4

5

6

-8

0.110 (2.79) 0.004 (0.11) Thick

1

+7

2

See Detail A for Label Dimensions

0.030 ± 0.010 (0.76 ± 0.25) 0.250 (6.35) 0.010 (0.25) Thick

2

1.064 ± 0.012 (27.03 ± 0.31)

R 0.156 ± 0.127 (R 3.96 ± 3.23) 2

2

1.598 ± 0.030 (40.59 ± 0.76) Location of LED when Illuminated

2 PDT—Non-Illuminated Bottom View

3

2

0.100 ± 0.010 (2.54 ± 0.25)

2

5

4

2

0.750 ± 0.008 (19.05 ± 0.20)

USA

6

Panel Opening

0.450 ± 0.006 (11.43 ± 0.15)

Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.060 to 0.150 (1.52 to 3.81)

2 2

-8

1 PST—Illuminated Bottom View

2 2

1.970 ± 0.012 (50.04 ± 0.31)

1.734 ± 0.005 (44.04 ± 0.13)

0.867 ± 0.005 (22.02 ± 0.13)

2

Label Dimensions Detail A

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-75

2.12 2 2 2

Rockers Accessories

Dimensions for NGR, EURO SR, Full Size Euro-Look and ESPORT Rocker Accessories Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) NGR Connector

Euro/SR and Full Size Euro-Look Connector

0.962 ± 0.029 (24.38 ± 0.76)

2.180 (55.37) 1.815 ± 0.059 (45.97 ± 1.52)

2

0.910 (23.11)

2

0.812 (20.62)

8

6

5B

0.954 ± 0.005 (24.13 ± 0.13)

2

4

7

2

5A

2

1.877 ± 0.059 (47.50 ± 1.52)

1.335 ± 0.005 (33.78 ± 0.13)

1.255 (31.88)

1.400 (35.56)

2 2 2 2

NGR Connector Catalog Number 28-5637-2 accepts Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals or AMP compatible connector 28-5940 accepts AMP terminals 42100-2.

0.812 (20.62) 0.698 (17.73) 0.976 (24.79)

2 2 2

1.400 (35.56)

2

Euro-Look and EURO/SR Connector Catalog Number 28-3426 accepts Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals.

2 2 2

ESPORT Connector

2 2 2

Retaining hinge functions to keep parts intact through shipment and handling. Fracture of the hinges does not affect form, fit or function of the connector and its terminal retention features.

Dimension Applies at Base of Snap Leg

2 2

3

6

2

2

5

1.697 ± 0.020 (43.10 ± 0.51)

1

2 2 2

ESPORT Connector Catalog Number 28-5558 Locations 1, 2, 3, 4, 5 and 6 accept 1.701 ± 0.020 Packard 12015870 Metri-Pack terminals. (43.21 ± 0.51) Locations 7 and 8 accept Packard 4 12034046 Metri-Pack terminals. 8

7 0.910 ± 0.020 (23.11 ± 0.51)

1.392 ± 0.014 (35.36 ± 0.38)

2.180 ± 0.020 (55.37 ± 0.51)

2 2 V11-T2-76

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2.12

Rockers Accessories

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

2

Gang Mounting System 1.030 (26.16)

R 0.125 (R 3.18)

2.060 (52.32)

2

0.867 (22.02)

2 2

1.734 (44.02) End Bezel

1.897 (48.18)

2

2.000 (50.8) 2.280 (57.91)

(2) End Bezels

(2) End Bezels and (1) Center Bezel

2.026 + 0.010 (51.46 + 0.25/– 0.000)

3.056 + 0.010 (77.62 + 0.51/– 0.000)

2 R 0.187 (R 4.75) R 0.165 (R 4.19)

0.661 (16.79)

NGR, Euro-Look and ESPORT Panel Plugs

C

17-21159

17-19264

17-19263

0.847 (21.51)

1.009 (25.63)

Euro-Look ESPORT

NGR

A

0.080 (2.03)

0.100 (2.54)

B

R 0.060 (R 1.52)

R 0.080 (R 2.03)

C

0.340 (8.64)

0.335 (8.51)

D

0.530 (13.46)

0.550 (13.97)

E

R 0.156 (R 3.96)

R 0.250 (R 6.35)

E

Panel Opening Reference Only Thickness: 0.030 to 0.190 (0.76 to 4.83) Panel plug Catalog Number 17-19544-2 for Use with Euro-Look and ESPORT. NGR panel plug Catalog Number 17-21543.

2

1.024 (26.01)

Part will also fit Eaton gang mounting boxes. Catalog Numbers 17-19263 and 17-19264 0.867 + 0.005/– 0.000 (22.02 + 0.13/– 0.00)

2

R 0.156 (R 3.96)

2 2

0.650 +0.010/ –0.001 (16.51 +0.25/ –0.02) 0.985 ± 0.007 (25.02 ± 0.20)

2 2 2 2

0.130 ± 0.010 (3.30 ± 0.25)

1.450 (36.83) 1.190 (30.23)

Panel Opening

2 2

1.735 ± 0.012 (44.07 ± 0.31)

1.427 ± 0.005 (36.25 ± 0.13) 1.734 + 0.005/– 0.000 (44.04 + 0.13/– 0.00)

2

0.494 (12.55)

Tolerence: +0.254/−0.000 (+ 0.254/–0.000) for Each Center Bezel up to a Maximum of + 0.0002 (+ 0.050)

Top View

2 2

D

1.380 (35.05)

1.970 (50.04)

17-21160

Euro-Look

1.255 + 0.009/ –0.001 (31.88 +0.25/ –0.03)

A

Bottom View

NGR

EURO SR Panel Plugs

B

1.530 (38.86)

Center

Dimensions: 2.026 + 0.254/−0.00 (51.46 + 0.254/–0.000) Plus Number of Center Bezels Times 1.03

2 1.200 (30.48)

End

1.900 ± 0.020 (48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)

Panel Opening—Reference Only Thickness: 0.039 to 0.078 to 0.118 (1.00 to 2.00 to 3.00)

2

0.150 (3.81)

Bezel Catalog Numbers Panel Opening for 2 End Bezels

1.900 ± 0.020 (48.26 + 0.51/– 0.00)

2

2 2

0.820 ± 0.005 (20.83 ± 0.13)

2

Panel Opening—Reference Only Thickness: 0.040 to 0.140 (1.01 to 3.55) Best Results Obtained From: 0.080 to 0.125 (2.03 to 3.17)

2 2 2

0.680 0.830 (16.66) (21.08)

2 2

Panel Plug Catalog Number 53-3318 For Use with EURO/SR

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-77

2.13 2 2

SinglePole

Rockers Technical Data

1 2 3

2 2 2

TwoPole

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

2 2 2

FourPole

7 8 9

10 11 12

Terminal Identification

Circuit Diagrams

When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified.

Rocker Circuit Diagrams

All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard.

2 2 2 2 2

“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram

Connection Points Connect common to terminals

2

2

Connect circuit “A” to terminals

6

Connect circuit “B” to terminals

4

Connect circuit “C” to terminals

1

2 2

UP Position

No. of Poles Circuit A

2 2

B 1PDT

C 2PST

2 3

D 2PDT

1 2 3

E 4PST 1

1 PDT

2

1

Schematic

I 2 Circuit 5

1

4

3

6

2

4

1

3

J 1PST

1 2 3

K 1PDT

5 6

L 2PST

4 5 6

2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12

7 10 8 11 9 12

1 4 2 5 3 6

Single-Pole G3 1PST

4

M 2PST

2 4 1 3

6

N 2PDT

P 1PDT

2 6

3

Circuit with Lever in … 3 ON Independent

Circuit Letter

2 3

F 4PDT 2

ON-ON-ON Special Circuit

Schematic

A 1PST

For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect wiring per instructions given below.

2 2

Circuit Letter

CENTER Position (Maintained) Circuit B

DOWN Position (Keyway)

H4 1PDT

4 2 3

Q7 2 Circuit

6

B A

C C

NC NO H G NC NO

Circuit C

1

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

6

4

5

6

Legends Rocker Switch Legend Legend

Rocker Switch Type Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever

2

Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever

2

Center terminal and switch lever

2

Momentary contact

Bulb

Denotes mechanical contact portion

2

See next page for Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams. See Page V11-T2-17 for NGR Circuit Diagrams.

2

Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

2 2 2 2 V11-T2-78

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Technical Data

2.13

Midsize Switch Circuit Diagrams 1 Non-Illuminated Circuit Number (Circuit Designator)

Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN CENTER Position Position

UP Position

Schematic

1 1PST

OFF

2

NONE

ON

Circuit Number (Circuit Designator) 18 1PST

1 2 1PST

OFF

12 11

3 1PST

NONE

OFF

2

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

1 4 1PST

OFF

2 1

5 1PDT

NONE

ON

3

ON

NONE

3

ON

2

OFF

MOM. ON

2

NONE

ON

1 ON

2

3

OFF

MOM. ON

MOM. ON

2

3

OFF

MOM. ON

1

11 2PST

12 2PST

13 2PDT

12

25

11

24

12

25

11

24

12

25

11

24

12 13 25 26 11

14 2PDT

13 12 26 25

16 2PDT

13 12 26 25

11

17 2PDT

11

OFF

NONE

ON

OFF

NONE

ON

2

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

2

MOM. OFF

NONE

ON

ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

OFF

ON

ON

NONE

ON

ON

NONE

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

MOM. ON

ON

NONE

ON







2 2

25 26

3 1

2

2

12 11

2

13

23 1PDT

25 26 24 13

24 1PDT

26

25

25 1PDT

2 2 2

26 25

26 1PDT

26 13 24

27 2PST

OFF

NONE

ON

28 2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

29 2PST 3

MOM. OFF

NONE

ON

30 2PDT

ON

31 2PDT

25

2

NONE

2

26 25 13 24 12

25

12

2 2

24

25 12 11 24 13 26

11 ON

2 2

11

ON

OFF

ON

MOM. ON

NONE

ON

ON

OFF

MOM. ON

24

25

2

25

11

24

32 Indicator

2 2

24

12

2 2

3 2

2

Notes 1 Terminal numbers 1, 2 and 3 denote single-pole base. Terminal numbers 11, 12, 113, 24, 25 and 26 denote two-pole base. 2 Single-pole in two-pole base with lamp independently wired. 3 Two-pole—independently wired lamp.

2 2 2

24

12 26

13

11

21 1PST

2

ON

24

12

2

NONE

2

12 11

2

OFF

24

15 2PDT

11

3 1

24

13 12 26 25 11

Schematic

13 24

1

10 2PST

UP Position

13 24

3

9 1PDT

Circuit with Rocker In … DOWN CENTER Position Position

ON

1

8 1PDT

20 1PST 2

ON

1

7 1PDT

19 1PST

22 1PDT

2

6 1PDT

2

Illuminated

25

MOM. ON

OFF

2

MOM. ON

2

24

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-79

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

AA

AQ

BF

BU

AB

AR

BG

BV

AC

AS

BH

BW

AD

AT

BI

BX

AE

AU

BJ

BY

AF

AV

BK

BZ

AG

AW

BL

CA

AH

AX

BM

CB

AJ

AY

BN

CC

AK

BA

BP

CD

AL

BB

BQ

CE

AM

BC

BR

CF

AN

BD

BS

CG

AP

BE

BT

CH

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-80

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix CI

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix CX

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

DN

Catalog Number Suffix EC

2 2 2

CJ

CY

DP

2

ED

2 CK

DA

DQ

2

EE

2 CL

DB

DR

2

EF

2 CM

DC

DS

2

EG

2 CN

DD

DT

2

EH

2 CP

DE

DU

2

EI

2 CQ

DF

DV

2

EJ

2 CR

DG

DW

2

EK

2 CS

DH

DX

EL

CT

DJ

DY

EM

CU

DK

DZ

EN

CV

DL

EA

EO

CW

DM

EB

EP

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-81

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

EQ

FE

FS

GG

ER

FF

FT

GH

ES

FG

FU

GI

ET

FH

FV

GJ

EU

FI

FW

GK

EV

FJ

FX

GL

EW

FK

FY

GM

EX

FL

FZ

GN

EY

FM

GA

GP

EZ

FN

GB

GQ

FA

FO

GC

GR

FB

FP

GD

GS

FC

FQ

GE

GT

FD

FR

GF

GU

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-82

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix GV

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix HM

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

JD

Catalog Number Suffix JT

2 2 2

GW

HN

JE

2

JU

2 GY

HP

JF

2

JV

2 HA

HQ

JG

2

JW

2 HB

HR

JH

2

JX

2 HC

HS

JJ

2

JY

2 HD

HT

JK

2

JZ

2 HE

HU

JL

2

KA

2 HF

HV

JM

2

KB

2 LUZ

HG

HW

JN

KC

HH

HY

JP

KD

HJ

JA

JQ

KE

HK

JB

JR

KF

HL

JC

JS

KG

2 2

PASILLO

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-83

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR, SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

KV

KH

2

Catalog Number Suffix LJ

EXIT

2

KI

KW

KJ

KX

2 2

EXH BRK

LK

LL

24V. CHARGER

2 2

KK

KY

KL

KZ

KM

LA

KN

LB

LP

LC

LQ

LD

LR

KQ

LE

LS

KR

LF

LT

2 2 2 2 2 2

AQUA HOT HEAT EXCHGR AIR COMPSR

LM

LN

LO

DIAG

2 2

KO

2 2

KP

2 2

CRUISE SELECT TEST ALARMS

2 2

PA

2 AUX HYD OVERHEAT

2 KT

2

LH

VIDEO

2

KU

2

LI

ENTER

2 2

LG

KS

2

1 2

G-AUX START CNTR A/C

REAR A/C

LU

LV

LW

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-84

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix LX

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix ML

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

NB

Catalog Number Suffix NP

LY

MM

NC

2

NQ

2

CODE LZ

MN

ND

2

NR

POSITION

2

LIGHT

UPPER WARN

LOWER WARN COMPT LIGHTS

WORK LIGHTS FAST IDLE MIRROR HEAT

GEN PTO

MA

MO

NE

2

NS

2 MB

MP

NF

2

NT

2 MC

MS

NG

2

NU

2 MD

MT

NH

2

NV

2 ME

MU

NI

2

NW

2 MF

MV

NJ

2

NX

2 MG

MW

NK

NY

MH

MX

NL

NZ

MI

MY

NM

PA

MJ

MZ

NN

PB

MK

NA

NO

PC

2 2 2 2 2

WIGWAG

SIREN BRAKE LEFT SCENE 1 2

2 2

DIAG

MASTER WARN

2

2 2 2 2 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-85

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

PD

PS

PE

PT

PF

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

RG

RW

RH

RX

PU

RI

RY

PG

PV

RJ

RZ

PH

PW

RK

SA

PI

PX

RL

SB

2 2 2 2

CHECK ENGINE

2 2 2 2 2 2

D

2 2

PY

PJ

RM

SC

H

2 2

PK

PZ

RN

SD

PL

RA

RP

SE

PM

RB

RQ

SF

PN

RC

RS

SG

PP

RD

RT

SH

RE

RU

SJ

RF

RV

SK

2 2

ABS CODE

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 PQ

2 2

PR

2

OVER LOAD DRIVE AXLE

2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-86

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix SL

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix TA

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

TQ

Catalog Number Suffix UE

2 2 2

SM

TB

TR

2

UF

2 SN

TC

TS

2

UG

Mode

2 SP

TD

TT

2

UH

2 SQ

TE

TU

2

UK

2 SR

TF

TV

2

UL

2 SS

TG

TW

2

UM

2 ST

TH

TX

2

UN

2 SU

TJ

TY

2

UP

2 SV

TK

TZ

UR

SW

TL

UA

US

SX

TM

UB

UT

SY

TN

UC

UU

SZ

TP

UD

UV

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-87

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

UW

VM

WC

WT

UX

VN

WD

WU

UY

VP

WE

WV

UZ

VR

WF

WW

VA

VS

WG

WX

VB

VT

WH

WY

VC

VU

WJ

WZ

VD

VV

WK

XA

VE

VW

WL

XB

VF

VX

WM

XC

VG

VY

WN

XD

VH

VZ

WP

XE

VK

WA

WR

XF

VL

WB

WS

XG

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-88

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix XH

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix XY

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

YN

Catalog Number Suffix ZC

2 2 2

XJ

XZ

YP

2

ZD

2 XK

YA

YQ

2

ZE

2 XL

YB

YR

2

ZF

2 XM

YC

YS

2

ZG

2 XN

YD

YT

2

ZH

2 XP

YE

YU

2

ZJ

2 XR

YF

YV

2

ZK

2 XS

YG

YW

2

ZL

2 XT

YH

YX

ZM

XU

YJ

YY

ZN

XV

YK

YZ

ZP

XW

YL

ZA

ZR

XX

YM

ZB

ZS

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-89

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

ZT

H1

Y1

N2

ZU

J1

Z1

P2

ZV

K1

A2

R2

ZW

L1

B2

S2

ZX

M1

C2

T2

ZY

N1

D2

U2

ZZ

P1

E2

V2

A1

R1

F2

W2

B1

S1

G2

X2

C1

T1

H2

Y2

D1

U1

J2

Z2

E1

V1

K2

A3

F1

W1

L2

B3

G1

X1

M2

C3

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-90

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix D3

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix T3

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

H4

Catalog Number Suffix Y4

2 2 2

E3

U3

J4

2

Z4

2 F3

V3

K4

2

A5

2 G3

W3

L4

2

B5

2 H3

X3

M4

2

C5

2 J3

Y3

N4

2

D5

2 K3

Z3

P4

2

E5

2 L3

A4

R4

2

F5

2 M3

B4

S4

2

G5

2 N3

C4

T4

H5

P3

D4

U4

J5

Q3

E4

V4

K5

R3

F4

W4

L5

S3

G4

X4

M5

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-91

2.14 2 2

Rockers Symbols Library

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

N5

C6

S6

G7

P5

D6D6

T6

H7

Q5

E6

U6

J7

R5

F6

V6

K7

S5

G6

W6

L7

T5

H6

X6

M7

U5

J6

Y6

N7

V5

K6

Z6

P7

W5

L6

A7

Q7

X5

M6

B7

R7

Y5

N6

C7

S7

Z5

P6

D7

T7

A6

Q6

E7

U7

B6

R6

F7

V7

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-92

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

NGR Only Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix W7

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix L8

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

A9

Catalog Number Suffix Q9

2 2 2

X7

M8

B9

2

R9

2 Y7

N8

C9

2

S9

2 Z7

P8

D9

2

T9

2 A8

Q8

E9

2

U9

2 B8

R8

F9

2

V9

2 C8

S8

G9

2

W9

2 D8

T8

H9

2

X9

2 E8

U8

J9

2

Y9

2 F8

V8

K9

Z9

G8

W8

L9

1A

H8

X8

M9

1B

J8

Y8

N9

1C

K8

Z8

P9

1D

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T2-93

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

NGR Only Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

1E

1L

1S

1Y

1F

1M

1T

1Z

1G

1N

1U

2A

1H

1P

1V

2B

1J

1Q

1W

2C

1K

1R

1X

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-94

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

MM

LX

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

NB

Catalog Number Suffix NR

MN

LY

NC

2

NS

SHDN OVRD

HI RPM LOW RPM

2 MP

MA

ND

2

NT

EXHST BRK MB

2 2

SET/CST

2

2

2 MQ

NE

2

NU

2 MC

MR

NF

2

NV

2 MS

MD

NG

2

NW

2 TEST

MT

ME

NH

2

NX

2

P MU

MF

P MG

MH

MV

NJ

F N

MW

2

NY

2 NK

2

NZ

2 NL

O3

2

AUX WARN

2

MI

MX

NM

PA

MJ

MY

NN

PB

MK

MZ

NP

PC

ML

NA

NQ

PD

2 2 2 2

OVER LOAD

2 2 2

RSM/ACC 1 2

2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-95

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

PT

QH

QX

PF

PU

QJ

QY

PG

PV

QK

PH

PW

QL

PI

PX

QM

PE

2

AUTO

2 2 2 2

AUTO

2 2 2 2

SET ACCEL RESUME DECEL

QZ

RA

RB

CTIS

2

PJ

PY

QN

RC

PK

PZ

QP

RD

2 2

WINCH

2 2

QA

PL

QQ

RE

CRANE

2 2

QB

QR

QC

QS

QD

QT

RH

PQ

QE

QU

RJ

PR

QF

QV

RK

PS

QG

QW

RL

PM

2

AUTO

2

PN AUTO

2

n/min

2

PP

AUTO MODE MAN MODE

RF

RG

AUTO

2

n/min

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-96

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix SB

RM

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

SR

Catalog Number Suffix TF

2 2 2

SC

RN

SS

2

TG

2 SD

RP

ST

2

TH

2 RQ

SE

SU

2

TJ

2 RR

SF

SG

RS

SV

RPM CTRL

SW

2

TK

2 2

TL

2 SH

RT

SX

2

TM

2 SJ

RU

SY

2

TN

2

ENG DIAG

RV

SK

SZ

2

TP

2

RW

SL

TA

RX

SM

TB

TR

RY

SN

TC

TS

RZ

SP

TD

TT

SA

SQ

TE

TU

2

TQ

2 2

CHEM ALARM

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-97

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

TV

UK

UZ

VP

TW

UL

VA

VQ

TX

UM

VB

VR

TY

UN

VC

VS

TZ

UP

VD

UA

UQ

VE

VU

UB

UR

VF

VV

UC

US

VG

VW

UD

UT

VH

VX

UU

VJ

VY

UV

VK

VZ

UG

UW

VL

WA

UH

UX

VM

WB

UY

VN

WC

2 2 2 2 2 2 2

FAULT

2

VT

OK

2 2 2

P

2

2 2 2 2 2 2

UE

F

2 2

UF

LH

2 2 2

AUTO

2 2

UJ

2

RH

2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-98

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix WD

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix WT

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

XJ

Catalog Number Suffix YA

2 2 2

WE

WU

XL

2

YB

2 WF

WV

XM

2

YC

2 WG

WX

XN

2

YD

2

SET/RES WH

WY

XP

2

YE

2 WJ

WZ

XQ

2

YF

2 WK

XA

XR

2

YG

2 WL

XB

XS

2

YH

2 WM

XC

XT

2

YJ

2 WN

XD

XU

YK

WP

XE

XV

YL

WQ

XF

XW

YM

WR

XG

XY

YN

WS

XH

XZ

YP

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-99

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

YQ

ZE

ZV

K1

YR

ZF

ZW

L1

YS

ZG

ZX

M1

YT

ZH

ZY

N1

YU

ZJ

ZZ

P1

YV

ZK

A1

R1

YW

ZL

B1

S1

YX

ZM

C1

T1

YY

ZN

D1

U1

YZ

ZP

E1

V1

ZA

ZR

F1

W1

G1

X1

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

RPM

2 2

ZB

ZS

ZC

ZT

H1

Y1

ZD

ZU

J1

Z1

RPM

2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-100

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Rockers Symbols Library

2.14

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2 Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix A2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix R2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

G3

Catalog Number Suffix U3

2 2 2

B2

S2

H3

2

V3

2 C2

T2

I3

W3

2 2

D2

U2

J3

2

X3

2 E2

V2

K3

2

Y3

2 F2

W2

L3

2

Z3

2 G2

X2

M3

2

A4

2 H2

Y2

N3

2

B4

2 J2

Z2

O3

2

C4

2 K2

A3

P3

D4

L2

B3

Q3

E4

M2

C3

R3

F4

N2

D3

S3

G4

P2

F3

T3

H4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

2 V11-T2-101

2.14

Rockers Symbols Library

2

SVR, E31, E32 and E33 eSM Symbols 1 2

2

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

Inscription

Catalog Number Suffix

I4

P4

V4

B5

J4

Q4

W4

C5

K4

R4

X4

D5

L4

S4

Y4

X5

M4

T4

Z4

X6

N4

U4

A5

X7

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

O4

2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2 2

1 2

Additional icons are available. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. SAE Specification No. J1362.

V11-T2-102

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices High Capacity Switch

3.1

High Capacity Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.2

3.3

Keylock

V11-T3-2 V11-T3-2 V11-T3-2

V11-T3-3 V11-T3-3 V11-T3-4 V11-T3-4

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3.4

V11-T3-2

Panelboard Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

Panel Board Switch

V11-T3-2

3 3 3 3 3 3 3

V11-T3-5 V11-T3-5 V11-T3-6 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-8

Locking Rocker Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3

V11-T3-9 V11-T3-9 V11-T3-9 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Locking Rocker

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-1

3.1 3

Special Devices High Capacity Switches

Contents

High Capacity Switch

Description

3

High Capacity Switches

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Description

Technical Data and Specifications

The heavy duty high capacity switch, Catalog Number 7818K1 is ideal for exceptionally high-power applications, for heavy-duty motor loads and for use in welding equipment or similar industrial applications.

High Capacity Switches

By combining innovative design and quality materials, this switch is designed to carry the specified maximum inrush current for 10 milliseconds for a minimum of 20,000 ON/OFF cycles.

Terminal types

Screw—brass (Catalog Number 11-6074-4) supplied. Furnish unassembled

Mounting means

Molded flush mounting bracket, high impact polycarbonate, 3.312 in (84.12 mm), center-to-center spacing and 2.375 in (60.33 mm) spacing for self-tapping screws

Lever

Nylon

Standards and Certifications

Dimensions



UL® to Standard 508, File E147754

Description

Specification

Circuits

2PST, maintained

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break snap acting butt contact Make: 200A peak inrush at 125 Vac for 10 ms for 20,000 cycles minimum Break: 20A at 125 Vac for 20,000 cycles minimum

Contact material

10% silver cadmium oxide composite

Base

Molded thermoset material

Dielectric withstand

2200V rms minimum

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 7818K1

3 3 3

3.812 (96.82) 3.281 (83.34) Mtg.

Product Selection

3

2.250 (57.15) Max.

3 3 3

0.781 (19.84)

1.250 (31.75)

3 3

1.406 (35.71) Max.

High Capacity Switch Description

Catalog Number

40A, 600 Vac 5 hp, 250 Vac

7818K1

V11-T3-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices Panelboard Switches

3.2

Contents

Panel Board Switches

Description Panelboard Switches Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . .

Page

3

V11-T3-4 V11-T3-4

3

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Description This group of two-position power toggle switches is used by manufacturers in a wide variety of applications that require dependability and long service, such as welding equipment, commercial floor polishers, battery chargers, food processors and panelboards.

3

Standards and Certifications ● ●

3

UL Recognized CSA® Certified as noted

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-3

3.2

Special Devices Panelboard Switches

3

Product Selection

3

8980K1

Panelboard Switches Poles and Throw

Mounting

Terminals

Catalog Number

60A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 125–250 Vac/Vdc 1

2PST

N/A

N/A

8980K1 2

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 30A, 125V “T” 2 hp, 120–240 Vac

1P double break

Frame plate

Center bus

8980K2

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 20A, 600 Vac 2 hp, 120–600 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K5

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 20A, 600 Vac 2 hp, 120–600 Vac Three-phase

3PST

Panel type

Screw

8980K6

3

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 120–240 Vac 1 hp, 480 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K14 3

3

30A, 250 Vac/Vdc 2 hp, 120–240 Vac

2PST

Panel type strap

Screw

8980K16

Rating

3 3 3 3

8980K5

3 3

3 3 3

Technical Data and Specifications Panelboard Switches Description

Specification

3

Rating

10–60A; 120–600V See Product Selection table

3

Circuits

1PST, 2PST, 3PST 2 circuit, maintained Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, momentary

3

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action Except for Catalog Number 8980K13, quick-make/quick-break butt contact

3

Contact material

Movable—bronze; stationary—copper; Catalog Number 8980K13—silver

Terminal types

Screw or bus

3

Termination material

Copper

Mounting means

Two-hole mounting—panel type flush

3

Dielectric withstand

1000 volts rms minimum

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

3 3

Notes 1 For appliance use only; 32A, 480 Vac, 25A, 600 Vac. 2 CSA Certified. 3 Binding screws assembled. For binding screws provided unassembled, order Catalog Number 8980K30.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V11-T3-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

3.3

Contents

General Purpose and Heavy Duty Keylocks

Description

Page

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T3-6 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-7 V11-T3-8

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Description

Features

General Purpose

Termination Types

Mounting Means

General Purpose Solder lugs—Brass silverplated

General Purpose Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia.

Heavy Duty ● 7842 Series Screw terminals—Brass designed to accept #7-32 x 3/16 binding head screws

Keyway—0.062–0.067 in wide x 0.035–0.370 deep (1.55–1.70 mm wide x 0.89–0.94 mm deep

These keylock switches provide reliable performance in a space-saving design. They all use quick-make/ quick-break switching mechanisms, with wiping action blades for self-cleaning contacts.

Heavy Duty These switches have a slowmake/slow-break switching mechanism with large butt type contacts. Their high current switching capability allows them to be used for locking switching circuits in power applications.

Furnished unassembled 7846 Series Quick connect terminals— Brass ●

Hardware supplied— 1 hexnut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 chamfered dress nut (Cat. No. 15-994-2) Furnished unassembled

3 Heavy Duty ● 7842 Series Slotted bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia. Hardware supplied— 4 terminal screws and 1 hexnut Furnished unassembled 7846 Series Hardware supplied— 2 hexnuts ●

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-5

3.3 3

Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

Product Selection General Purpose Keylock AC/DC Switches

3

Circuit with Key in … (Keyway Down) CENTER Position RIGHT LEFT (Keyway) Position Position

Key Removal Position

Solder Lug Terminal Catalog Number

3

Rating

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PST

— —

OFF OFF

ON ON

CENTER CENTER and RIGHT

8928K492 8928K493

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PDT



ON

ON

CENTER and RIGHT

8928K494

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1-1/2A, 250 Vdc

1PDT



ON

ON

CENTER

8283K150

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vdc

2PST

— —

OFF ON

ON OFF

CENTER CENTER

8370K150 8370K151

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PST



OFF

ON

CENTER and RIGHT

8928K495

3

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 250 Vdc

2PDT

— —

ON ON

ON ON

CENTER CENTER and RIGHT

8373K150 8373K151

3

Poles and Throw

Heavy Duty Keylock AC Rated Switches

3

Rating

3

Circuit

Action

Key Removal Slotted Bushing Length Position Inches mm

Type of Termination

Key Style

Catalog Number

2PST

OFF-ON-OFF-ON

OFF

Quick Connect

E (13-8173)

7846K1 1

7846 Type Series 20A, 120 Vac 20A, 240 Vac 1-1/2 hp, 120 Vac 2 hp, 240 Vac

3 3

0.50

12.7

Note 1 Not CSA Certified.

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 V11-T3-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

3.3

Accessories Keys for Locking Switches Additional keys may be ordered from the Key Selection table.

Where Used

13-8171

Key styles shown match those listed for specific switches in the Product Selection tables.

3

Key Selection

13-5496

13-8173

3

Catalog Number

General purpose and heavy duty series

13-5496

3

Security locking bracket

13-8171

3

7846K1

13-8173

3 3 3

Rotary Keylock Brackets— Security Tumbler Type

Key Selection

This series of rotary keylock is designed for use in security applications. They provide a simple method of converting single- and two-pole toggle switches. For use with twoor three-position switches.

Where Used

3

Catalog Number

Key removable in counterclockwise position

3

8980P25

3

Key removable in clockwise 8980P27 position Key removable in either extreme position

3

8980P28

3 3

Technical Data and Specifications

3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated Description

General Purpose

Heavy Duty

3

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT Maintained action

2PST, 2-circuit maintained

3 3

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Contact material

Movable—Bronze silver-plated Stationary—Brass silver-plated

Movable—Silver cadmium oxide Stationary—Silver cadmium oxide

3 3

Rotary Keylock Brackets Description

Specification

Bushing

7/8 in dia., 24 threads/inch

3 3

Mounting hardware and keys 1 hexagon locknut

Cat. No. 15-2528-2

1 bright chrome plated dress nut

Cat. No. 15-2528-2 (furnished unassembled)

2 keys

Cat. No. 13-8171

3

Lock bushing

Diecast zinc

Lock barrel and dress nut

Chrome plated brass

3

Keys

Brass

3

Finish

3 3 3 3 3 3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-7

3.3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Keylock Switches, General Purpose/Heavy Duty—AC/DC Rated

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8928K493—1PST/1PDT

8373K151—2PST/2PDT 0.196 (4.97)

0.198 (5.03) 0.200 (5.08)

0.516 (13.11)

0.196 (4.97)

0.198 (5.03) 0.200 (5.08)

0.516 (13.11)

18°

18°

18°

0.471 (11.96) Dia. 0.473 (12.01)

0.056 (1.42) 0.068 (1.73)

0.056 (1.42) 0.068 (1.73)

Mtg. Hole

3 3

Special Devices

15/32−32 Thds.

Mtg. Hole Key Removable in Both Positions

0.061 (1.55) 0.063 (1.60)

3

0.545 (13.84)

0.841 (21.36)

3 3

1.375 (34.92)

0.687 (17.45) 1.080 (27.43)

0.750 (19.05) 0.960 (24.38)

1.080 (27.43)

3

Key Removable in Both Positions

15/32−32 Thds.

0.490 (12.45)

3

18°

0.471 (11.96) Dia. 0.473 (12.01)

0.010 (0.25)

0.220 (5.59)

0.823 (20.90)

0.735 (18.67)

0.175 (4.44)

3 3

7842K2—2PST

3 3 3 3 3

7846K1—2PST

Keyway 0.065 W x 0.032−0.035 D (1.65 W x 0.81−0.89 D)

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.044−0.046 D (2.03–2.16 W x 1.12–1.17 D)

15/32−32 TPT

0.718 (18.24)

0.953 (24.21)

0.750 (19.05) 1.032 (26.21)

0.343 (8.71)

3

1.171 (29.74)

1.312 (33.32)

3 3 3 3 3

1.296 (32.92)

3

0.906 (23.01)

3 3 3 V11-T3-8

7/8–24 T.P.I. (22.23)

15/32−32 TPT

0.500 (12.70)

0.562 (14.27)

8980P27

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Special Devices Locking Rockers

3.4

Contents

Locking Rockers

Description

Page

Locking Rockers Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10 V11-T3-10

3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3 3

Product Description This unique switch features a patented internal locking mechanism, which allows the switch to be locked in the OFF position to prevent unauthorized or accidental operation. The key to locking

or unlocking the switch is a removable paddle rocker cap, which must be inserted in order to move the switch to the ON position. The switch can still be turned OFF.

The locking rocker is ideally suited for such markets as portable tools, computers, lawn and garden equipment, marine and construction.

3

Standards and Certifications ● ● ●

3

UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1

3 3

Note: Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative for selection information and optional features.

Locking Rocker Switch DOWN Position

Poles and Throw

Base Circuit (See Page V11-T3-10)

Catalog Number

3 3

Without Palm Guard Feature

3

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

8166K27

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

8166K28

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

8166K25

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

8166K26

3

ON

NONE

OFF

A

8166K23

3

3

With Palm Guard Feature 20A, 125 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac

3 3

Circuit with Rocker in … UP CENTER Position Position

20A, 125 Vac 20A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125 Vac 2 hp, 250 Vac

3 3

Product Selection

Rating 2

3

1PST 1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

8166K24

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

8166K21

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

8166K22

3 3

Notes 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers. 2 Ratings listed for 125 Vac also apply at 28 Vdc. Also supplied with a 20A, 277 Vac rating as standard.

3 3 3

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T3-9

3.4

Special Devices Locking Rockers

3

Accessories

3

53-3021-2

Replacement Cap

3

Description

Catalog Number

Red paddle rocker replacement cap

53-3021-2

3 3 3

Technical Data and Specifications

Circuit Diagrams

3

Locking Rocker Switch

Locking Rocker Circuit Diagrams

Description

Specification

Circuit Letter

3

Contact mechanism

Butt action contact mechanism designed specifically for use on AC and low voltage DC applications

3

A 1PST

Contact material

Movable—Silver-plated copper w/cad-oxide contact face button Stationary—Copper w/cad-oxide contact face button

3 3 3 3 3 3

Terminal types

0.25 in spade terminals are standard

Rocker material

Custom styled, red thermoplastic rocker key with “REMOVE TO LOCK” across the top of the key in raised letters

Dielectric

1000V rms minimum

Recommended Panel Cutout Dimensions 0.650 (16.51)

0.440 (11.18) 0.250 (6.35)

0.745 (18.92)

3

1.450 (36.83)

0.960 (24.38)

0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.08)

Locking Rocker Switch with Palm Guard

3

Recommended Panel Cutout Dimensions

0.960 (24.38)

0.744 (18.90)

0.225 (5.72)

0.650 (16.51)

1.700 (43.18)

1.190 (30.23)

1.080 (27.43)

3 3

1.190 (30.23)

1.700 (43.18)

1.080 (27.43)

3

3

1 2 3

Locking Rocker Switch without Palm Guard

3

3

B 1PDT

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

3

3

2 3

Dimensions

3

3

Schematic

0.250 (6.35)

3

0.440 (11.18)

1.450 (36.83)

0.745 (18.92)

0.960 (24.38)

0.680 (17.27) 0.830 (21.08)

3 3 V11-T3-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Circuit Letter

Schematic

C 2PST

2 3

D 2PDT

1 2 3

5 6 4 5 6

Toggle Switches Military

4.1

Introduction Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.2

Illuminated AC Rated

4.4

4.7

X Series Toggles

4.9

V11-T4-10 V11-T4-10

V11-T4-12 V11-T4-16 V11-T4-16

V11-T4-20 V11-T4-21 V11-T4-21

V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-26

V11-T4-27 V11-T4-29 V11-T4-29

Accessories Mounting Hardware . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-31

Decorator Facenuts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Panel Seal . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Replacement Terminal Screws . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-33

Indicating Plates . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-34

Technical Data Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

V11-T4-24

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.8

V11-T4-9

X Series Toggles Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

General Purpose AC/DC Rated

V11-T4-7

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.6

V11-T4-6

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.5

V11-T4-3

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4

Military Purpose Toggles Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4.3

V11-T4-2

V11-T4-35

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-1

4.1 4

Toggle Switches Introduction

Contents

Toggle Switches

Description

4

Military Purpose Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated AC Rated Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated. . . . . . . . . . . General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated. . . . . . . . X Series Toggles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Selection Guide

4

Toggle Switches

4

Military Purpose Toggles

Illuminated AC Rated Switches

General Purpose Toggles— AC Rated

Product Selection

Page V11-T4-3

Page V11-T4-9

Page V11-T4-20

Circuit Diagram

Page V11-T4-35



Page V11-T4-35

Product Description

Eaton’s military purpose switches are designed to meet the requirements of MIL-S-83731

These illuminated switches are available only in single-pole circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized with single-pole housing the lamp.

These AC rated toggle switches offer the widest selection of features and the design flexibility to meet a variety of applications.

X Series Toggles

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

General Purpose Toggles— AC/DC Rated

4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Selection

Page V11-T4-20

Page V11-T4-24

Page V11-T4-27

Circuit Diagram

Page V11-T4-35



Page V11-T4-35

Product Description

This line of switches employs a quickmake/quick-break contact mechanism. These switches are especially suited for use in small motor applications.

Eaton’s new, competitively priced, AC rated X Series toggles offer a standard high rating for both single- and two-pole applications.

The most common application for this switch is to help prevent motor damage resulting from the high current generation by counter EMF of the armature at the time of reversing.

4 4 V11-T4-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-3 V11-T4-9 V11-T4-11 V11-T4-20 V11-T4-24 V11-T4-27 V11-T4-31 V11-T4-35

Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles

4.2

Contents

Military Purpose Toggles

Page

4

V11-T4-6 V11-T4-7

4

Description Military Purpose Toggles Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description Eaton’s military purpose switches are designed to meet the requirements of MIL-S-83731. Sealed Switches have a silicone rubber lever seal assembled between the lever and the bushing to resist the entrance of contaminants such as dust, sand or water into the contact structure.

The switch mechanisms are completely enclosed to resist the entrance of contaminants into the switch. All metal parts are plated to resist corrosion. The heavy duty switches are offered in both standard toggle lever and lever lock versions. Circuit designations are stamped on the side of each switch.

4

Standards and Certifications ●

4

MIL-S-83731

4 4 4 4 4

Product Selection

4

AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-S-83731 Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position Current Ratings

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

DOWN Position (Keyway)

4

Military Solder Lug Terminals Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Dimension “A” Inches (mm)

Dimension “B” Inches (mm)

MIL-S-83731 with Sealed Lever

Catalog Number

Single-Pole See A below

1PST

ON ON OFF

NONE NONE NONE

OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON

A



0.906 (23.01)

MS25098-22 MS25098-29 MS25098-30

8261K22 8261K29 8261K30

See A below

1PDT

ON ON

NONE NONE

ON MOM. ON

B

0.937 (23.80)



MS25098-23 MS25098-26

8261K23 8261K26

Two-Pole See B below

2PST

ON ON OFF

NONE NONE NONE

OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON

C



0.906 (23.01)

MS25100-22 MS25100-29 MS25100-30

8262K22 8262K29 8262K30

See C below

2PDT

ON ON

NONE NONE

ON MOM. ON

D

0.937 (23.80)



MS25100-23 MS25100-26

8262K23 8262K26

Current Ratings Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole = 125 Vac, 60 Hz Part Number A AII MS25098 B MS25100-22, 29, 30 C MS25100-23, 26

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

3.0 3.0 1.0

1.5 1.5 1.0

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

V11-T4-3

4.2

Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 with Lever Seal

4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

4

Poles and Throw

4

Current Ratings

4

Single-Pole

4 4 4 4 4

CENTER Position

DOWN Position (Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

Screw Terminals with Sealed Lever MS Part Number

Catalog Number

See A below See B below

1PST

ON ON ON ON NONE OFF

NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF OFF NONE

OFF NONE MOM. OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON

A

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35058-22 MS35058-24 MS35058-29 MS35058-25 MS35058-28 MS35058-30

8801K22 8801K23 8813K17 8813K18 8811K18 8811K17

See A below See B below

1PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF

ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35058-21 MS35058-23 MS35058-26 MS35058-27 MS35058-31

8800K16 8810K15 8804K13 8812K14 8809K16

See C below See D below

2PST

ON ON ON ON NONE OFF

NONE OFF NONE MOM. OFF OFF NONE

OFF NONE MOM. OFF NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON

C

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35059-22 MS35059-24 MS35059-29 MS35059-25 MS35059-28 MS35059-30

8822K20 8822K21 8828K13 8828K12 8826K14 8826K15

See C below See D below

2PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF

ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS35059-21 MS35059-23 MS35059-26 MS35059-27 MS35059-31

8820K16 8824K14 8830K13 8834K5 8832K6

See E below

1P3T in a 2P base

ON 1 ON 1 MOM. ON 1 ON 1 ON 1 MOM. ON 1

ON 2 ON 2 ON 2 ON 3 ON 3 ON 3

ON 4 MOM. ON 4 MOM. ON 4 ON 4 MOM. ON 4 MOM. ON 4

See Page V11-T4-35

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS25201-4 MS25201-5 MS25201-6 MS25201-7 MS25201-8 MS25201-9

8860K4 8860K5 8860K6 8860K7 5 8860K8 5 8860K9 5

See F below See G below

4PST

ON ON ON NONE OFF

NONE OFF MOM. OFF OFF NONE

OFF NONE NONE MOM. ON MOM. ON

E

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

— MS25068-24 MS25068-25 MS25068-28 —

7660K12 7660K13 7668K7 7666K9 7666K6

See F below See G below

4PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF

ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

MS25068-21 MS25068-23 MS25068-26 MS25068-27 MS25068-31

7662K7 7664K5 7674K5 7672K5 7670K6

Two-Pole

4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Four-Pole

4 4 4 4 4

Current Ratings Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 28 Vdc

115 Vac, 60 Hz

Switch

Type of Operation

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

MS35058 MS35058 MS35059 MS35059 MS25201 MS25068 MS25068

Maintained Momentary Maintained Momentary ON-ON-ON Maintained Momentary

7 5 7 5 5 5 4

25 20 20 18 18 20 18

15 10 15 10 10 12 10

— — — — 2 — —

10 10 20 11 11 — —

10 7 — — 8 — —

3 — 4 — 2 4 2

10 — 20 — 11 20 11

10 — 15 — 8 15 5

4 4

A B C D E F G

4 4 4

115 Vac, 400 Hz

Notes 1 Across terminals 2-3 and 5-6. 2 Across terminals 1-2 and 5-6. 3 Across terminals 2-3 and 4-5. 4 Across terminals 1-2 and 4-5. 5 For “INDEPENDENT ON-ON-ON” circuit arrangement, see Page V11-T4-35.

4 4 4 4 V11-T4-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.2

Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-S-83731 Lever Lock with Lever Seal Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position Current Ratings

CENTER Position

DOWN Position

Poles and Throw

Base Circuit See (Keyway) Page V11-T4-35

Lever Lock Bushing Style 1

4

Screw Terminals with Sealed Lever Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Lock Length “B” Inches (mm)

4

MS Part Number

Catalog Number

Single-Pole

4 4

See A below

1PST

ON ON ON

NONE NONE OFF

OFF OFF NONE

A

3 4 5

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25125-C2 MS25125-E2 MS25125-J4

8857K47 8857K48 8857K49

See A below

1PDT

ON ON ON

OFF NONE NONE

ON

B

2 3 4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25125-B1 MS25125-C3 MS25125-E3

8857K40 8857K45 8857K44

4

ON ON ON

OFF OFF NONE

C

1 2 4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25126-A1 MS25126-B1 MS25126-E3

8858K39 8858K40 8858K44

4

ON

NONE

F

4

0.562 (14.27)

1.000 (25.40)

MS25127-E3

8859K44

ON ON

Two-Pole See B below

2PDT

ON ON ON

Four-Pole See C below

4PDT

ON

Indicates direction against which lever is locked.

Switch

4 4 4 4

Current Ratings

A MS25125 B MS25126 C MS25127

4

Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 28 Vdc

115 Vac, 60 Hz

Type of Operation

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

Lamp Load

Resistive Load

Inductive Load

Maintained Maintained Maintained

5 7 5

20 20 20

15 15 15

— — —

— — —

— — —

3 4 4

10 20 20

10 15 15

115 Vac, 400 Hz

4 4 4 4

Note 1 See illustrations below for lever lock bushing styles.

4 Lever Lock Bushing Styles Style 1

Style 2

Style 3

Style 4

4

Style 5

4 4

Locked in Three Positions

Locked in Center Positions

Locked in Keyway Side

Locked out of Center Position

4

Locked in Center and Side Opposite Keyway

4

These illustrations are for pictoral representation only—keyway on right-hand side.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-5

4.2

Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) Military with Unsealed Lever

4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP CENTER DOWN Position Position Position

4 4

Current Ratings

4

Single-Pole

4 4

Poles and Throw

4

NONE NONE NONE

OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON

A

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7300K38 7304K38 7303K38

7300K36 7304K36 7303K36

See A below

1PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF

ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7301K38 7302K38 7307K38 7306K38 7305K38

7301K36 7302K36 7307K36 7306K36 7305K36

See C below See D below

2PST

ON ON OFF

NONE NONE NONE

OFF MOM. OFF MOM. ON

C

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7310K38 7314K38 7313K38

7310K36 7314K36 7313K36

See C below

2PDT

ON ON ON MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE NONE OFF OFF

ON ON MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.688 (17.45)

7311K38 7312K38 7317K38 7316K38 7315K38

7311K36 7312K36 7317K36 7316K36 7315K36

See D below

Current Ratings

4 4

Type of Operation

4

Single-Pole A Maintained B Momentary Two-Pole C Maintained D Momentary

4 4

4

5 4

20 15

15 10

15 15

7 5

30 20

15 10

25 15

Horsepower

250 Vac, 60 Hz Resistive Inductive Load Load

Horsepower

— —

— —

6 6

— —

— —

— —

— —

9 6

— —

— —

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 1P3T (ON-ON-ON), 4PST and 4PDT; maintained and momentary action

Contact action

Heavy duty—Slow-make/slow-break butt contact Medium duty—Quick-make/quick-break, wiping action

Contact material

Heavy duty: Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Medium duty: Movable—copper silver-plated Stationary—bronze silver-plated

Terminal types

Heavy duty MIL-S-83731 types: Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 6.35 mm (0.250 in) pan head (Catalog Number 11-1893) screws and Si bronze #6 helical lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-1096). Furnished unassembled. Terminal screws are tin dipped to facilitate soldering if required Heavy duty JAN-S-23 types: Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32 x 4.78 mm (0.188 in) binding head (Catalog Number 811-2) screws. Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals—tintillate plated brass Medium duty MIL-S-83731 types: Solder lugs—brass silver-plated furnished with 0.094 in (2.39 mm) dia. hole

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep; provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied: MIL-S-83731 types— 2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6), 1 locking ring (Catalog Number 29-761) and 1 internal tooth lockwasher (Catalog Number 16-886). Furnished unassembled JAN-S-23 types—2 hexagon facenuts (Catalog Number 15-966-6). Furnished unassembled

4 4

125 Vac, 60 Hz Resistive Inductive Load Load

Military Purpose Switches

4 4

Current Capacity in Amperes per Pole 30 Vdc Lamp Resistive Inductive Load Load Load

Technical Data and Specifications

4 4

Screw Terminals Catalog Number

ON ON OFF

4

4

Solder Lug Terminals Catalog Number

Two-Pole

4

4

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

1PST

See B below

4

4

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

See A below See B below

4

4

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

4 4

Dielectric

1000V minimum

4

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

V11-T4-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.2

Toggle Switches Military Purpose Toggles

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

AC/DC Rated (Medium Duty) MIL-83731 Switches

4

1PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug) 0.070 (1.78)

14˚

0.687 (17.45)

0.680 (17.27)

14˚

0.687 (17.45)

0.041 (1.01)

15/32−32NS−2A

0.468 (11.89)

Dim. A 0.937 (23.80)

0.070 (1.78)

14˚

0.680 (17.27)

14˚

1

1.250 (31.75)

2

3 (Ref.)

Dim. A 0.937 (23.80)

4

5

6 (Ref.)

1

2

3 (Ref.)

0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal

0.080 (2.03) Dia. End Terminal 0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal

1.250 (31.75)

B

15/32-32 Thds.

0.620 (15.75)

4

A

1.310 (33.27)

#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35) Pan Head Screws

4

1.060 (26.92)

1.040 (26.42)

0.750 (19.05)

4

1.310 (33.27)

1.120 (28.45)

15/32−32 Thds.

4 4

#6-32 x 0.250 (6.35) Long Pan Head Screws

Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide B

4 4

Four-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action

15/32−32 Thds.

1.430 (36.32)

Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

4 4

B

4

A

A

1.200 (30.48)

4

4

B

A

Two-Pole Momentary Action and 3 ON Circuits

4

4

0.750 (19.05)

#6-32 x 0.180 (4.57) Long Pan Head Screws

4

4

Two-Pole Maintained Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

15/32-32 Thds.

4

4

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Switches with Lever Seal

Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

4 4

Dim. B 0.906 (23.01)

0.090 (2.29) Dia. Center Terminal

Single-Pole Maintained and Momentary Action

4 4

0.041 (1.01)

15/32−32NS−2A

0.468 (11.89)

Dim. B 0.906 (23.01)

4

2PDT Maintained Action (Solder Lug)

4 1.320 (33.53)

4

1.250 (31.75)

4 4

#6−32 x 0.250 (6.35) Long Pan Head Screws

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4 V11-T4-7

4.2 4 4 4

4

AC Rated (Heavy Duty) MIL-83731 Lever Lock Switches with Lever Seal

AC Rated (Heavy Duty)

Single-Pole

1PDT Maintained Action

4

28˚

Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

14˚

15/32-32 Thds.

1.120 (28.45)

B

0.620 (15.75)

0.620 (15.75)

1.140 (28.96) 1.120 (28.45)

Keyway 0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W (0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

60˚ #6-32 x 0.180 (4.57) Long Binding Head Screw

Two-Pole

4

2PDT Maintained Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

4

28˚ 14˚ 0.750 (19.05)

4

B 15/32-32 Thds.

B

4 0.900 (22.86)

Keyway 0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W (0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

A

A

4 4

1.040 (26.42)

#6-32 Screws

4

4

15/32-32 Thds.

A A

4 4

B

15/32 Dia.

4 4

Military Purpose Toggles

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4 4

Toggle Switches

1.250 (31.75)

1.310 (33.27)

0.760 (19.30)

0.030 (0.76) Ref.

0.270 (6.86) 0.040 (1.02)

#6-32 Screws

0.180 (4.57)

Four-Pole

2PDT Momentary Action Keyway 0.030 (0.76) Deep 0.060 (1.52) Wide

36˚ 18˚

0.750 (19.05) 0.800 (20.32)

B 15/32-32 Thds.

B Keyway 0.030−0.040 D x 0.060−0.070 W (0.76−1.02 D x 1.52−1.78 W)

A

A 1.310 (33.27) 1.310 (33.27)

4 4

1.590 (40.39)

0.910 (23.11)

#6-32 Screws

0.300 (7.62)

4 V11-T4-8

0.030 (0.76) Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.3

Toggle Switches Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Contents

Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Page

4

V11-T4-10 V11-T4-10

4

Description Illuminated AC Rated Switches Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description These illuminated toggles are available only in singlepole circuitry. A two-pole base is utilized with singlepole housing the lamp. On single-throw circuits, the lamp is wired to operate in conjunction with the switch.

4

On double-throw circuits, the lamp is independent of the switch. On the sealed versions, a silicone rubber seal is fitted to the paddle lever to provide a moistureand dust-resistant seal between the lever and bushing.

4 4 4 4 4

Catalog Number Selection

4

How To Order—Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Example: Circuit with Toggle in … UP CENTER Position Position

Rating

Poles and Throw

Standard 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

Sealed 15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST 1PDT

ON

NONE

7071K21

DOWN Position (Keyway)

Base Catalog Number

Circuit Number See Page V11-T4-35

OFF

7071K21

G

G

1

52

4 4

Code letters and/or numbers— add to base circuit number. Lever Color G = Green T = Red A = Amber

Bulb Voltage

4

1 = 14V

4 Terminal Type

ON ON MOM. ON

NONE OFF OFF

OFF ON MOM. ON

7073K21 7073K20 7073K25

G

4

52 = 0.250 in spade

4 4

H

4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-9

4.3 4 4

Toggle Switches Illuminated AC Rated Toggles

Technical Data and Specifications Illuminated AC Rated Toggles Description

Specification

4

Ratings

See Catalog Number Selection

Circuits

1PST and 1PDT; maintained and momentary action

4

Contact material

Movable—silver-plated copper Stationary—silver-plated copper

4

Terminal types

Spade—brass

Base material

Colored thermoplastic paddle lever

4 4 4

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Illuminated 0.210 (5.33) Dia.

4 4

0.070 (1.78)

1.310 (33.27)

28˚ 14˚

0.270 (6.86)

0.750 (19.05)

0.650 (16.51)

4

0.470 (11.94)

4 4

0.910 (23.11) 1.430 (36.32)

4

A

4

0.250 (6.35)

Keyway 0.030 (0.76) 0.070 (1.78) Wide Deep x 0.040 (1.02) 0.080 (2.03) Quick Connect 0.440 (11.18) Type “A” Dim.

0.030 (0.76) Ref. 0.030 (0.76)

1.310 (33.27)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

Contents

General Purpose Toggles

Description

Page

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-12 V11-T4-16 V11-T4-16

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description

Features

These AC rated toggle switches offer the widest selection of features and the design flexibility to meet a variety of applications.

The optional features shown below may not be available on all toggle models. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series ●

● ● ●







● ●

● ● ●

3-independent ON Circuit (2PDT or 4PDT only, see Page V11-T4-14) Short (11/32 in) bushing Tall (15/32 in) bushing White nylon designer lever, see Dimensions on Page V11-T4-16 Black nylon designer lever, see Dimensions on Page V11-T4-16 Hardware— furnished assembled Reversing jumpers (not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) Short (15/32 in) bat lever Tall (11/16 in) bat lever (not available with short bushing) Rotate keyway 180° Lever seal Omit one pole (2P, 3P, 4P only. Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit)

4

Options 7800 Series Only ●





● ●



3-independent ON circuit (2PDT or 4PDT only, see Page V11-T4-14) Hardware— furnished assembled Reversing jumpers (Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit) Rotate keyway 180° Silicone lever seal (1P and 2P only) Omit one pole (2P, 3P, 4P only. Not for use with 3-independent ON circuit)

Combi-Term Option This is an extension of our AC rated general purpose toggle switch. The “Combi-Term” design allows the user the option of screw terminals, 0.25 in quick connects or solder termination all on the same switch. The special clips and screws are provided in a poly bag with the switch.

Circuits ●



1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT, 3PST, 3PDT, 4PST and 4PDT Maintained and momentary

Standards and Certifications ● ●



4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

UL®

Recognized CSA® Certified (except as noted) RoHS Compliant 1

4 4

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-11

4.4 4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Product Selection

4

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

4 4

Rating 6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

DOWN Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

OFF

A

ON

NONE

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

1PDT

ON MOM. ON

NONE OFF

MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

1PDT

MOM. ON ON

OFF NONE

1PDT

ON MOM. ON

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125V Vac

1PST

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

Screw Terminals

0.250 in Spade Terminals

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30)

7580K7 7580K6

7580K5 7580K4

7580K9 7580K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7581K6

7581K4

7581K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7582K6

7582K4

7582K8

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7585K6 7587K6

7585K4 7587K4

7585K8 7587K8

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7506K3

7506K4

7506K6

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7506K38

7506K36

7506K40

MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7509K4 7510K6

7509K5 7510K7

7509K7 7510K9

OFF OFF

MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7508K38 7509K38

7508K36 7509K36

7508K40 7509K40

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30)

7501K12 7501K13

7500K13 1 7500K14 1

7501K14 7501K15

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7503K13 1

7502K13

7503K15

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7505K4

7504K4 1

7505K6

20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7546K38

7546K36

7546K40

4

30A, 125 Vac 25A, 250 Vac 2

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)

0.563 (14.30)



7576K2



4

Notes 1 Also 4.2A L at 125 Vac rating. 2 Single-pole switch in two-pole base.

4

1PST

Bushing Lever Length “A” Length “B” Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

4 4

10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position Rating

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

DOWN Position

4

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Lever Length “A” Length “B” Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in Screw CombiSpade Terminals Terminals Term

4 4 4

6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 2A, 277 Vac 2.5A, L at 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7590K6

7590K4

7590K8



6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac 2.5A, L at 125 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7591K6

7591K4

7591K8



2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7592K6

7592K4

7592K8



4

6A, 125 Vac 3A, 250 Vac

2PDT

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7597K6

7597K4

7597K8



2PDT

ON

ON

OFF

7530

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7530K1

7530K3

7530K2



4

10A 250 Vac, 15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp 125–250 Vac

2PDT

ON

ON

ON

7555

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7555K12

7555K11

7555K13



15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30)

7561K5 7561K4

7560K6 7560K5

7561K7 7561K6



4

4 4 4 4

15A, 125 Vac 2PDT 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30) 0.563 (14.30)

7563K5 7563K4

7562K5 7562K4

7563K7 7563K6



15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7565K5

7564K6

7565K7



15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac

2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7566K4

7566K5

7566K7



2PDT

ON MOM. ON ON

OFF OFF NONE

MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7568K3 1 7569K1 7570K4

7568K2 1 7569K2 7570K5

7568K4 1 7569K3 7570K7

— — —

2PDT

MOM. ON

OFF

MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7569K38

7569K36

7569K40



20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7630K38

7630K36

7630K40



2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7632K38

7632K36

7632K40



4

Section A 10A 250 Vac; 15A 125 Vac, 3/4 hp 250 Vac, 4.2A L 125 Vac; Section B 10A 250 Vac, 15A 125 Vac, 1/4 hp 250 Vac

2PDT

OFF

1 ON

2 ON

7571

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7571K2

7571K4

7571K6



4

20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 120–240 Vac

2PST

ON

NONE

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7803K11

2PDT

ON ON MOM. ON

OFF NONE OFF

ON ON MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7803K12 7803K32 7803K22 3 7803K42 7803K13 7803K33 7803K23 3 7803K43 7803K17 2 7803K37 2 7803K27 2 7803K47

4 4 4 4 4

4 4 7803K31

7803K21 2 7803K41

2

Notes 1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating. 2 Not CSA Certified. 3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-13

4.4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Three-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in …

4

UP Position

4 4 4 4 4 4 4

DOWN Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1 hp, 3 Ph 125–600 Vac 1 hp, 1 and 2 Ph 125–480 Vac

3PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7700K1

7700K2

7700K3



3PDT

ON ON

OFF NONE

ON ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7701K1 7702K1

7701K2 7702K2

7701K3 7702K3

— —

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

3PDT

MOM. ON MOM. ON

OFF NONE

ON ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7704K1 7705K1

7704K2 7705K2

7704K3 7705K3

— —

20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 120 Vac 1, 2 and 3 Ph

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7804K12

7804K32 2 7804K22 2 7804K42 2

Rating

4

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

Bushing Lever Length “A” Length “B” Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in Screw Spade CombiTerminals Terminals Term

24

AC Rated Toggle Switches—Four-Pole

4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

4

CENTER Position

DOWN Position

Catalog Number

4

Rating

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

4

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

4PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7691K14

7690K8





4PDT

ON ON

OFF NONE

ON ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7693K2 7695K5

7692K13 7694K4

— —

— —

20A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac

4PST

ON

NONE

OFF

E

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7933K38

7933K36

7933K40



4PDT

ON ON

OFF NONE

ON ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7934K38 7935K38

7934K36 7935K36

7934K40 7935K40

— —

20A, 125 Vac 4PDT 10A, 250 Vac 1 hp, 125–240 Vac 2 and 3 Ph

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.469 (11.91)

0.688 (17.48)

7805K12 2 7805K32 2 7805K22 2 7805K42 2

4 4 4 4

Poles and Throw

Bushing Lever Length “A” Length “B” Solder Inches (mm) Inches (mm) Lugs

0.250 in Screw Spade CombiTerminals Terminals Term

Notes 1 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating. 2 Not CSA Certified. 3 Also 7.5A, 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 120–240–277 Vac. 4 1 hp at 240–480 Vac single- or two-phase and 240–600 Vac three-phase.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Single-Pole Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position Rating

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

4

Catalog Number DOWN Position (Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

Solder Lugs

Screw Terminals

0.250 in Spade Terminals

10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac

1PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7506K20

7506K21

1PDT

MOM. ON ON ON

OFF NONE OFF

MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

— — —

7509K20 7510K20 7508K20

7509K21 7510K21 7508K21

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125V–250 Vac

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7501K22

7500K20 2

7501K21

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7502K20

7503K21

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7504K20 2

7505K21

4 4 4 4 4 4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw ON

NONE

Catalog Number DOWN Position

4

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

Solder Lugs

Screw Terminals

0.250 in Spade Terminals

OFF

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7560K20

7561K21

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 125 Vac

2PST

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7562K20

7563K21

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7564K20

7565K21

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 1/2 hp, 250 Vac

2PST

OFF

NONE

MOM. ON

C

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)



7566K20

7566K21

2PDT

ON MOM. ON ON

OFF OFF NONE

MOM. ON MOM. ON MOM. ON

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

— — —

7568K20 2 7569K20 7570K20

7568K21 2 7569K21 7570K21

4 4 4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

4 4 4 4 4

Catalog Number DOWN Position

4

4

AC Rated Special Circuit Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

Rating

4

4

AC Rated Sealed 1 Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

Rating

4

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

Solder Lugs

Screw Terminals

0.250 in Spade Terminals

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac

2PDT

2-3, 5-6

OFF

2-6, 5-3

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7563K24

7562K23

7563K25

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

2-3, 5-6

NONE

2-6, 5-3

D

0.469 (11.91)

0.563 (14.30)

7565K24

7564K23

7565K25

4 4 4 4 4

Notes 1 Seal is lever seal only and is dust and splash resistant. Panel seal is available, Part Number 32-341. 2 Also 1/2 hp at 125–250 Vac Rating.

4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-15

4.4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4

Technical Data and Specifications

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated Description

Specification

4

Ratings

See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

4

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-brake butt contact

Terminal types

Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #6-32x 3/16 binding head (Cat. No. 811-2) screws Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals—tintillate-plated brass Spade terminals—combi-term—brass

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1), except 7700–7705, which have bright nickel hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2) Furnished unassembled

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

4 4 4 4 4 4

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4

Contact Material

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series Switches 3 to 6

Silver-plated copper

Silver-plated copper

4

10 to 20

Silver-plated copper with silver buttons

Silver-plated copper with silver buttons

4

20 to 30

Silver-plated copper with cad oxide buttons

Copper with cad oxide buttons

7800 Series Switches 3 to 6

Silver-plated copper

Silver-plated copper

10 to 20

Copper with silver buttons

Copper with silver buttons

4

Ampere

Movable

Stationary

4 4

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series

4

1PST Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)

4 4

B

4

A

0.625 (15.87) 0.300 (7.62)

4 4

1.125 (28.57)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

0.469 (11.91)

4

1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

0.469 (11.91)

B 0.625 (15.87)

1.047 (26.59)

1.218 (30.93)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-16

A

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.100 (27.95) 0.440 (11.17) 0.031 (0.78) Ref.

4.4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued 2PDT Maintained (Solder Lugs)

4

2PDT Maintained (Spade Terminals)

4

28°

28° 15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

14°

14°

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

B

1.312 (33.32)

A

4 B

1.312 (33.32) 0.469 (11.91)

A

0.750 (19.05) 0.740 (18.79) 0.750 (19.05)

1.031 (26.18)

0.469 (11.91)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.270 (6.85)

0.440 (11.17)

36°

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

B

0.270 (6.86)

1.047 (26.59)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.562 (14.27)

1.312 (33.32)

0.469 (11.91) 0.750 0.797 (19.05) (20.24)

1.125 (28.57)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

0.910 (23.11)

0.300 (7.62)

2PDT Momentary (Spade Terminals)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) B

A

1.062 (26.97)

0.300 (7.62)

4

0.910 (23.11) Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.440 (11.18)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4 4

4 4

0.469 (11.91)

0.750 (19.05)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4

4 0.562 (14.27)

1.312 (33.32)

0.469 (11.91)

4

4

18°

14°

0.797 (20.24)

4

4

36°

1.312 (33.32)

4

4 0.031 (0.78) Ref.

28°

0.750 (19.05) 0.740 (18.79)

4

4

A

0.625 (15.87)

4

4

18°

0.469 (11.91)

4

4

2PDT Momentary (Screw Terminals)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

4

4

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

1PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

1.200 (30.48)

4

4 4 4 4

V11-T4-17

4.4 4 4

7500, 7600, 7700 and 7900 Series, continued 3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs)

31°

15.5°

4

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 1.312 (33.32)

0.562 (14.27)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91) 1.265 (32.13)

1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26)

0.469 (11.91)

0.750 (19.05)

1.333 (33.85) Max.

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

0.300 (7.62)

0.910 (23.11)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Solder Lugs) 0.031 (0.78) Ref.

0.270 (6.85)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals)

4

15.5°

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

4

1.333 (33.85) Max. 0.688 0.469 (17.47) (11.91)

0.965 (24.51)

4

0.300 (7.62)

4

1.225 (31.11)

1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26)

31°

4 4

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

4

4

1.437 (36.49)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

18°

4 4

0.469 (11.91)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Screw Terminals) 36°

4 4

0.440 (11.17)

2PDT Momentary (Solder Lugs)

4

0.688 (17.47)

0.965 (24.51)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

0.270 (6.85)

4

4

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4

4

1.333 (33.85) Max.

1.437 (36.49)

0.965 (24.51)

4

15.5°

1.333 (33.85) Max. 0.688 0.469 (17.47) (11.91)

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91)

4

4

3PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals)

31°

4 4

General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4 4

Toggle Switches

1.333 (33.85) Max. 1.437 (36.49)

Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

4PDT Maintained and Momentary (Spade Terminals) Keyway 0.068−0.075 W x 0.035−0.040 D (1.72−1.90) W x 0.88−1.02 D)

0.688 (17.47) 0.469 (11.91)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

1.437 1.546 (36.49) (39.26)

4

15/32−32 Thd. 0.469 (11.91) 1.405 (35.68) 0.440 (11.17)

1.333 (33.85) Max.

4 4 V11-T4-18

0.270 (6.85)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC Rated

4.4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

7800 Series 2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals) Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D (2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D) 0.671 (17.04)

4

4PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

4

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D (2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)

4

0.687 (17.45)

15/32-32 (11.91 TPI)

4

0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32−32)

0.469 (11.91)

0.469 (11.91)

0.812 (20.62)

4 4

0.812 (20.62)

1.312 0.234 (33.32) (5.94)

0.750 (19.05)

4

0.234 (5.54)

4

1.437 (36.50)

1.296 (32.92)

4 2PDT Maintained (Combi-Terminals)

4

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D (2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D)

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D (2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D) 0.671 (17.04)

4

3PDT Maintained (0.25 in Spade Terminals)

4

0.687 (17.45)

15/32-32 (11.91 TPI)

4

0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32−32)

0.469 (11.91)

0.469 (11.91)

0.812 (20.62)

4 4

0.812 (20.62)

4

0.440 (11.17)

0.375 (9.53) 1.312 (33.32)

0.750 (19.05)

1.296 (32.92)

0.031 (0.78) Ref.

4

1.437 (36.50)

4 3PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

4

Combi-Term Termination Options

Keyway 0.080−0.085 W x 0.040−0.047 D (2.03−2.16) W x 1.02−1.19 D) 0.687 (17.45)

4 4

0.469 (11.91) TPI (15/32−32)

0.469 (11.91)

4 4

0.812 (20.62) 0.218 (5.54)

Solder 1.296 (32.92)

Quick Connect

4

Screw

4

1.437 (36.50)

4 4 4 4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-19

4.5 4

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Contents

General Purpose Toggles

Description

4

Page

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4

V11-T4-21 V11-T4-21

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description This line of switches employs a quick-make/quick-break contact mechanism. The resultant high-speed movement eliminates the “teasing” of the switch and reduces the pitting of the

Options contact surfaces due to arcing. Self-cleaning and wiping contact action assures positive contact on switch operation. These switches are especially suited for use in small motor applications.

● ● ●



Standards and Certifications

Lever—11/16 in Lever seal Mounting hardware; furnished assembled Other lead lengths

● ● ●

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

4 4

UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS Compliant 1

Product Selection

4

AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Single-Pole

4 4

Rating

Poles and Throw

3A, 250 Vdc

1PST

6A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1PST 3A, 250 Vdc

4 4

1PDT

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

CENTER Position

DOWN Position

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “B” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “A” Inches (mm)

Catalog Number Solder Lugs

Screw Terminals

Wire Leads

ON

NONE

OFF

A

0.344 (8.74)

0.500 (12.70)

8280K115

8295K107

8290K115

ON ON MOM. ON

NONE NONE NONE

OFF OFF OFF

A

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70)

8381K107 8381K108 8928K478

8396K107 8396K108 —

8391K107 8391K108 —

ON

NONE

ON

B

0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70)

8928K479





Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

Bushing Length “B” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “A” Inches (mm)

Catalog Number Solder Lugs

Screw Terminals

Wire Leads

4 4

AC/DC Rated Toggle Switches—Two-Pole

4

Rating

4

7A, 125V 3A, 250 Vdc

4 4

Poles and Throw

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

CENTER Position

DOWN Position

2PST

ON MOM. ON

NONE NONE

OFF OFF

C

0.469 (11.91) 0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70)

8370K107 8928K481 1

8372K107 8928K482 1

8371K107 —

2PDT

ON ON

NONE NONE

ON ON

D

0.344 (8.74) 0.469 (11.91)

0.500 (12.70) 0.500 (12.70)

8373K108 8373K107

8375K108 8375K107

8374K108 8374K107

Note 1 Rating: 6A, 125 Vac/Vdc and 3A, 250 Vdc.

4 4 V11-T4-20

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.5

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Technical Data and Specifications

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

4

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection table; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

Circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT Maintained and momentary toggle action

Contact mechanism

Quick-make/quick-break wiping action

Contact material

Bronze silver-plated

Terminal types

Screw terminals—brass designed to accept #5-40 x 5/32 in (Cat. No. 11-26) screws Furnished unassembled Solder lug terminals—brass silver-plated with 0.085–0.090 in (2.16–2.29 mm) dia. hole Integrated wire leads—18 gauge, 6 in long and skinned 3/4 in Special wire leads lengths beyond 6 in are available at additional charge

4 4 4 4 4

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Mounting means

Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/inch Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x.89 mm) deep, provides anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied—1 hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and 1 bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1) Furnished unassembled

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4 4 4 4

Dimensions

4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8280K115 1PST Maintained (Solder Lug)

8290K115 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.500 (12.70)

8295K107 1PST Maintained (Screw Terminals) Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.500 (12.70)

0.532 (13.51)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

1.093 (27.78)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07) D

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

BC

A B

B C

C 0.200 (5.08)

0.562 (14.28)

0.046 (1.19)

0.562 (14.28)

0.968 (24.60) 1.250 (31.75) #5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw

Standard 6.000 (152.40) Long Wire Leads

4

A

4

B

0.046 (1.19)

0.562 (14.28)

0.968 (24.60)

0.968 (24.60) 0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

A

A

4 4

D 15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

4 4

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

D D

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

4

0.671 (17.06) 1.000 (25.40)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

4

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.500 (12.70)

1.000 (25.40)

1.000 (25.40)

4

8381K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Solder Lug)

C

0.687 (17.46)

4 4

0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole

0.203 (5.15)

4 4 4

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.411 (35.84)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.406 (35.71)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.406 (35.71)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.531 (38.89)

29-1/2°

4

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.656 (42.06)

25-1/2°

4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-21

4.5 4 4

8391K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead)

C

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

A

0.685 (17.39)

B

A B

C

C 0.687 (17.46)

1.093 (27.78)

0.950 (24.13)

Standard 6.000 (152.40) Long Wire Leads

4

4

D

A B

4

4

0.242 (6.14) Dia. D

15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

4

1.156 (29.36)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

4

4

0.690 (17.52) 1.390 (35.32)

D

4

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.671 (17.06)

0.240 (6.09)

4

8928K478 1PST Momentary (Solder Lug)

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

0.664 (16.86)

4

4

8396K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Screw Terminals)

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

4

4

General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4 4

Toggle Switches

1.093 (27.78)

0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole

#5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.531 (38.89)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.531 (38.89)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.980 (50.29)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.656 (42.06)

25-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.656 (42.06)

25-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.656 (42.06)

25-1/2°

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-22

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches General Purpose Toggles—AC/DC Rated

8370 and 8373K107 and K108 2PST/2PDT Maintained (Solder Lug)

8371 and 8374K107 and K108 1PST Maintained (Wire Lead)

8373 and 8375K107 and K108 2PST/2PDT Maintained (Screw Terminals)

4

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

4

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide

Keyway 0.035 (0.88) Deep 0.068 (1.72) Wide 0.687 (17.46)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

4 4

1.156 (29.37) 1.656 (42.07)

1.156 (29.36)

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

4

0.687 (17.46)

0.687 (17.46)

1.156 (29.36)

4.5

4 4

These Terminals Omitted on Single-Throw Switches

D

D 15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

15/32 Dia.32 Thds.

D

A B B C

0.640 (16.27)

4

0.245 (6.22) Dia. 0.239 (6.07)

A

4

C 15/32 Dia.− 32 Thds.

1.080 (27.43)

B C

0.873 (22.17) 0.830 (21.08) 1.000 (25.40)

0.090 (2.28) 0.085 (2.15) Dia. Hole

0.281 Double-Throw (7.14)

Two Solder Lugs Omitted for Single-Throw

4

A

4

0.640 (16.27)

4

1.093 (27.78) #5/40 x 5/32 Lg. Binding Head Screw

4

0.343 (8.73)

4

Single-Throw “A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

“A” Lever Dim.

“B” Bushing Dim.

“C” Overall Dim.

“D” Throw Dim.

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.694 (43.03)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.484 (37.69)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.344 (8.74)

1.484 (37.69)

29-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.820 (46.23)

25-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.515 (38.48)

25-1/2°

0.500 (12.70)

0.469 (11.91)

1.609 (40.87)

25-1/2°

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-23

4.6 4

Toggle Switches X Series Toggles

Contents

X Series Toggles

Description

4

Page

X Series Toggles Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4 4

V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-25 V11-T4-26

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description Eaton’s new, competitively priced, AC rated X Series toggles offer a standard high rating for both single- and two-pole applications. The new X Series toggle line offers a wide range of switching circuits, functions and accessories. Ratings for single- and two-pole include 20A at 125 Vac and 10A at 277 Vac to handle more severe inductive, motor and lamp loads. In addition, X Series toggles have a high standard horsepower rating of 1-1/2 hp, 125–250 Vac for two-pole applications.

Application Description The easy-to-install toggles also have an industrystandard 0.48 in diameter mounting hole. For added convenience and delivery support, select industrystandard switch circuit part numbers are available from stock. With so many features, X Series toggles can be used in a variety of applications.



● ●

● ●

● ●

● ●

Commercial and industrial equipment Household appliances Industrial machinery and automation Medical equipment Military communications and surveillance Rail systems Signaling and communications Test and lab equipment Telecommunications, cable and broadcasting

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-24

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications ●



UL Recognized component for Canada File E2702 RoHS Compliant 1

Note 1 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

4.6

Toggle Switches X Series Toggles

Product Selection

4

Single-Pole 1

4

Circuit with Toggle in … Poles and Throw

UP Position

CENTER Position

DOWN Position 2

Terminal Type—Catalog Number 0.250 in Spade

Screw

Solder Lugs

1PST

ON

NONE

OFF

XTD1A1A2

XTD1A2A2

XTD1A3A2

1PST

ON 3

NONE

OFF

XTD1F1A2

XTD1F2A2

XTD1F3A2

1PDT

ON

OFF

ON

XTD2B1A

XTD2B2A

XTD2B3A

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON

XTD2C1A

XTD2C2A

XTD2C3A

1PDT

ON

NONE

ON 3

XTD2D1A

XTD2D2A

XTD2D3A

OFF

ON

3

XTD2E1A

XTD2E2A

XTD2E3A

OFF

ON 3

XTD2G1A

XTD2G2A

XTD2G3A

1PDT

ON

1PDT

ON

3

4 4 4 4 4 4

Two-Pole 4 Circuit with Toggle in …

4

DOWN Position 2

Terminal Type—Catalog Number 0.250 in Spade

Screw

Solder Lugs

NONE

OFF

XTD3A1A2

XTD3A2A2

XTD3A3A2

NONE

OFF

XTD3F1A2

XTD3F2A2

XTD3F3A2

ON

OFF

ON

XTD4B1A

XTD4B2A

XTD4B3A

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON

XTD4C1A

XTD4C2A

XTD4C3A

2PDT

ON

NONE

ON 3

XTD4D1A

XTD4D2A

XTD4D3A

2PDT

ON 3

OFF

ON 3

XTD4E1A

XTD4E2A

XTD4E3A

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON 3

XTD4G1A

XTD4G2A

XTD4G3A

Poles and Throw

UP Position

CENTER Position

2PST

ON

2PST

ON 3

2PDT

4 4 4 4 4

Notes 1 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 3/4 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc. 2 Keyway position. 3 Indicates momentary position. 4 Ratings: 20A at 125 Vac, 10A at 277 Vac, 1-1/2 hp, 125–250 Vac; recommended up to 15A at 28 Vdc.

4 4

Accessories

4

See Accessories on Page V11-T4-31.

4

Technical Data and Specifications

4

X Series Toggles Description

Specification

Single-pole rating

20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 3/4 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc

Two-pole rating

20A, 125 Vac; 10A, 277 Vac; 1-1/2 hp 125–250 Vac; Recommended up to 15A at 28Vdc

Available circuits

1PST, 1PDT, 2PST, 2PDT

Terminal types

Brass screw, brass solder lugs, brass nickel-plated 0.250 in spade

Hardware included

Zinc nickel-plated knurl nut, zinc nickel-plated hex nut

Mounting means

Threaded bushing 12.0 +0.1, –0 mm; 16.5 +1, –1 mm

Keyway

1.8 mm located in DOWN position

Base material

Thermoset molding material

Finish

Bright nickel-plated toggle lever and bushing

Contact mechanism

Slow-make/slow-break butt contact

Contact resistance

50 ohm maximum

Dielectric strength

AC 1500V, 1 minute

Operating temperature

32° to 149°F (0° to 65°C)

Insulation resistance

DC 500V 100M ohm minute

Seal level rating

IP40

Packaging

Sealed in polybag labeled with part number

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-25

4.6 4 4

Toggle Switches X Series Toggles

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Single-Pole

Two-Pole

4

Keyway

4

0.629 ± 0.012 (16.00 ± 0.30)

1.299 ± 0.019 (33.00 ± 0.50)

ø0.236 ± 0.012 (ø6.0 ± 0.30)

4 B

4

C

4 4 4 4

0.063 ± 0.004 (1.60 ± 0.10) 0.433 ± 0.003 (11.00 ± 0.10)

C

D 3

2

1

6

5

4

15/32-32 NS-2A

4 4

ø0.236 ± 0.007 (ø6.00 ± 0.20)

B

D

4

ø0.472 +0.003/–0.000 (ø12.00 +0.10/–0.00)

A

A

4 4

Mounting Hole

0.748 ± 0.019 (19.00 ± 0.50)

1.125 ± 0.012 (28.60 ± 0.30)

4 4

Keyway

A 0.649 ± 0.039 (16.50 ± 1.00)

A 0.649 ± 0.039 (16.50 ± 1.00)

B 0.468 ± 0.012 (11.90 ± 0.30)

B 0.468 ± 0.012 (11.90 ± 0.30)

C 0.677 ± 0.019 (17.20 ± 0.50)

C 0.740 ± 0.019 (18.80 ± 0.50)

D 0.452 ± 0.019 (11.50 ± 0.50)

D 0.452 ± 0.019 (11.50 ± 0.50)

15/32-32 NS-2A

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-26

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4.7

Contents

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Description

Page

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

V11-T4-28 V11-T4-29 V11-T4-29

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Product Description One-Hole Panel Mount These heavy duty toggle switches are available in either two- or three-position. The three-position switches offer a unique positive center stop feature, which assures that the lever cannot be thrown from one side through the center OFF position without stopping. This design feature is a major factor in their widespread acceptance for motor reversing and speed control applications.

Flush Mount The most common application for the switch is to help prevent motor damage resulting from the high current generation by counter EMF of the armature at the time of reversing. This type of device is referred to within the industry as an antiplugging, hesitation, positive stop or positive off switch. Typical applications include bench tools, coach and truck (electric lift) and X-ray equipment.

These three-position switches also offer the positive center stop feature where the lever cannot be thrown from one side through the center OFF position without stopping. The high ratings of this series allow it to be used with a broad range of heavy duty applications. Copper contacts and brass screw terminals are standard.

4

Standards and Certifications ●



UL Recognized (except where noted) CSA Certified (where noted)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-27

4.7 4

Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Product Selection Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—One-Hole Panel Mount

4

Circuit with Toggle in …

4

UP Position

4 4 4 4 4

DOWN Position

Catalog Number

(Keyway)

Base Circuit See Page V11-T4-35

15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

2PDT

ON

OFF

ON

D

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7992K11

7992K10

7992K12

15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7991K11

7991K10

7991K12

15A, 125 Vac 1 10A, 250 Vac 3/4 hp, 250 Vac

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

F

0.468 (11.89)

0.687 (17.45)

Bat

7990K11

7990K10

7990K12

Rating

4

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw 2

Bushing Length “A” Inches (mm)

Lever Length “B” Inches (mm)

Lever Type

Solder Screw Terminals Lugs

0.250 in Spade Terminals

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches—Flush Mount

4

Circuit with Toggle in … UP Position

4

DOWN Position (Keyway)

Lever Type

Termination Type

Catalog Number

NONE OFF

ON ON

Square Square

Screw Screw

7810K1 7810K2 34

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7811K5 35

3PDT

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7812K2

4PDT

ON

OFF

ON

Square

Screw

7813K2

4

Rating

4

20A, 125 Vac/Vdc 10A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PDT

ON ON

4

30A, 125 Vac/Vdc 20A, 250 Vac/Vdc

2PDT

4

CENTER Position

Poles and Throw

Notes 1 Listed rating for 125 Vac also applies at 28 Vdc. 2 Supplied in a four-pole base. 3 CSA Certified. 4 Also rated 5A, 600 Vac; 1-1/2 hp, 250 Vdc; 2 hp, 240 Vac. 5 Also rated 2 hp, 250 Vac/Vdc.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-28

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Toggle Switches Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4.7

Technical Data and Specifications

4

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

4

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables; Switch ratings at 125 Vac also apply to 28 Vdc

Circuits

2PDT, 3PDT, 4PDT; maintained action

Contact mechanism One-hole panel mount

4 4

AC rated devices—slow-make/Slow-break butt contact AC/DC rated devices—Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts

Flush mount

4

Quick-make/quick-break wiping contacts

Contact material One-hole panel mount

4

AC rated devices: Movable—silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary—copper with fine or coin silver contact face button AC/DC rated devices: Movable—copper Stationary—bronze

Flush mount Terminal types Mounting means One-hole panel mount

Flush mount

4 4

Movable—copper Stationary—copper

4

Screw terminals—brass

4

AC rated devices: Threaded bushing—0.468 in (11.89 mm) dia., 32 threads/in Keyway—0.068 x 0.035 in (1.73 x 0.89 mm) deep, provide anti-rotation feature Hardware supplied— 1 hexagon locknut (Catalog Number 15-192) and 1 hex facenut (Catalog Number 15-966-6) Furnished unassembled

4 4 4

Flush mounting panel tabs

Dielectric withstand

1000V rms minimum

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

4 4

Dimensions

4

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

One-Hole Panel Mount

4

7990K10—4PDT

4

32˚ 0.430 (10.92)

4

15/32−32 Thds. 0.690 (17.53) 1.450 (36.83) Max.

1.550 (39.37) Max.

4

0.470 (11.94)

0.070 (1.78)

1.320 (33.53)

4

0.300 (7.62)

4

0.970 (24.64)

4 4 4

6−32 x 0.188 (4.77) Binding Head Screw

4 4 4 4 4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-29

4.7 4 4

Heavy Duty Hesitation Switches

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Flush Mount 7810K2—2PDT

4

7811K2—2PDT 3.781 (96.04)

4 4

Toggle Switches

3.781 (96.04) 3.281 (83.34)

3.281 (83.34)

0.968 (24.59)

1.312 (33.34)

4 4

1.593 (40.46)

4 4

3.781 (96.04)

1.859 (47.22)

1.593 (40.46)

4

2.937 (74.60)

4 4

7813K2—4PDT

4

3.781 (96.04)

4

3.281 (83.34)

4

3.281 (83.34)

1.312 (33.34)

4 4

1.890 (48.01)

4 4 4

2.937 (74.60)

0.406 (10.31)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-30

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

1.812 (46.02)

Toggle Switches Accessories

4.8

Mounting Hardware

4

Product Description One-Hole Mounting Switches All bushing mounted switches are furnished with two mounting nuts. One nut is mounted behind the panel to prevent the bushing sleeve from being distorted if the front panel is overtightened

4 4

Eaton accepts no responsibility for damage to switches mounted without the backup nuts.

4 4 4 4

Product Selection

4

Mounting Hardware for One-Hole Mounting Switches—Mounting Nuts 1

Size

Description

Material

Thickness Dim. “A” in Inches (mm)

3/8-27

Hexagon locknut

Nickel-plated brass

0.125 (3.18)

Inside Diameter Dim “B” in Inches (mm)

OD or Dimension Across Flats Dim. “C” in Inches (mm)

Dimension Across Corners Dim. “D” in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number



0.562 (14.27)

0.625 (15.88)

15-2526-2

3/8-24

Bright nickel-plated brass

11/32-32

Nickel-plated brass

0.063 (1.60)



0.473 (12.01)

0.531 (13.49)

15-1525-2

Zinc-chromate treated

0.075 (1.91)



0.625 (15.88)



15-192

Bright nickel-plated brass

0.078 (1.98)



0.546 (13.87)

0.625 (15.88)

15-2525-58

Zinc-chromate treated

0.188 (4.76)

0.783 (19.89)

1.125 (25.80)



15-2528-2

Nickel-plated brass

0.078 (1.98)



0.562 (14.27)

0.656 (16.66)

15-966-2

0.562 (14.27)



15-124F1

15/32-32

Hexagon locknut

Hexagon facenut



Semi-lustre nickel-plated brass Knurled facenut

Bright nickel-plated brass

— 0.066 (1.68)

Black cupric oxide-plated brass

Chamfered dress nut

15-1525-6



19-966-6



15-124F5

Brass nickel-plated brass

0.109 (2.77)

— —

0.625 (15.88)



15-90

Bright nickel-plated brass

0.151 (3.84)

0.312 (7.92)

0.687 (17.45)



15-994-2

Standard knurl nut with shoulder

Nickel-plated brass

0.109 (2.77)



0.593 (15.06)



15-2534-14

Dress nut

Satin chrome-plated brass

0.125 (3.18)



0.562 (14.27)



15-2523-4

Black nylon

0.187 (4.75)

0.390 (9.91)

0.640 (16.26)



15-1048-3

Knurled dress nut

Chrome-plated brass

0.187 (4.75)

0.312 (7.92)

0.640 (16.26)



15-189-5

3/4-32

Hexagon facenut

Nickel-plated steel

0.093 (2.36)



0.937 (23.80)

1.078 (27.38)

15-1043

#8-40

Hexagon locknut with facenut

Nickel-plated steel

0.060 (1.52)



0.245 (6.22)

0.216 (5.49)

15-1047

Note 1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only. Minimum ordering quantity on all items is 100.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-31

4.8 4 4 4 4 4

Toggle Switches Accessories

Mounting Washers and Locking Ring 1 Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

Size

Description

Material

Thickness Dim. “A”

For 15/32 bushing

Locking ring

Zinc-plated steel

0.040 (1.02)

Inside Diameter Dim “B”

OD or Dimension Across Flats Dim. “C”

Dimension Across Corners Dim. “D”

Catalog Number

0.475 (12.07)

0.718 (18.24)



29-761-5

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

4

Mounting Hardware

4

Hexagon Locknuts or Facenuts

Knurled Nut with Shoulder

Knurled Facenut

Chamfered Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-994-2

Knurled Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-189-5

4 4 4

4 4

B

C

C

A

A

Knurled Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-1048-3

Dress Nut Catalog No. 15-2523-4

4

Internal Tooth Lockwasher

Plain Washer

Locking Ring 0.063 (1.60)

B

B

0.475 (12.07)

0.043 (1.09)

B

B 0.109 (2.77)

4 4

A

A

4 4

C

C

C

A

4 4

B

D

C

C A

C A

C A

A

Note 1 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 V11-T4-32

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

0.031 (0.79) 0.031 (0.79)

0.050 (1.27) 0.719 (18.26)

Toggle Switches Accessories

Decorator Facenuts Product Selection

1

Replacement Terminal Screws

4

Product Selection

4

Type

Color

Catalog Number

Screw Size

Catalog Number 2

Knurled facenuts

Bright black Bright clear

15-1048-3 15-1048-7

#5-40 x 1/8 in

11-1117 11-26

Bright black Bright clear

15-1049-3 15-1049-7

#5-40 x 5/32 in #5-40 x 3/16 in binding head

811-7206

#5-40 x 1/4 in binding head

811-14

Beveled facenuts

811-2

#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head

811-161

#6-32 x 1/4 in binding head

811-7248

Catalog Number 15-1048

#6-32 x 1/4 in pan head, brass

11-1893

#6-32 x 3/8 in binding head

811-129

#8-32 x 3/16 in binding head

11-1618

#8-32 x 1/4 in

11-1369

#8-32 x 1/4 in

811-408-2

#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head

11-1766

#8-32 x 3/8 in binding head

11-6074-4

#6-32 x 7/32 in binding head

11-6085-2

0.438 (11.13) Dia. Hole

0.438 (11.13) Dia. Hole 0.625 (15.88) Dia.

0.625 (15.88) Dia.

0.060 (1.63)

20˚







● ●

● ●

Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering panel enclosure Behind panel mounting Stainless-steel cup washer ensures proper seating of silicone rubber seal Seal withstands 20 psi water pressure Cat. No. 32-341

0.072 0.082 0.467 Dia. 0.472 0.427 0.432

Silicone Rubber

4 4 4 4 4 4

● ●

Prevents moisture and contaminants from entering lever to bushing enclosure Front panel mounting Threaded mounting nut ensures proper assembly of silicon rubber boot Brass nut: 15/32-32 NS-2A Black color

SW1RY3030

Dimensions—32-341 1/16-Inch Lettering (located on angular surface)

4

Toggle Boot ●

Panel Seal

4 4

#6-32 x 3/16 in binding head

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Catalog Number 15-1049

4.8

Product Selection Mounting Description

Color

Catalog Number

Front panel mounting Molded in brass mounting nut (15/32-32 NS-2A) ensures proper assembly of silicon rubber boot

Black

SW1RY3030

0.670 Dia. 0.650 Thickness of brushing seal is reduced to 0.080 when mounted to panel

0.030 (0.80)

4 4 4 4 4 4 4

0.940 (24.00) 0.120 (3.00)

Cupwasher Stainless Steel

4

4

Dimensions—15/32-32 NS-2A

0.105 0.120

4

4

0.660 (16.70)

4 4

Ø0.643 (Ø16.34)

4

Ø0.330 (Ø8.40)

4

Inner Thread 15/32-32 NS-2A

4

Notes 1 Decorator facenuts for 15/32 in bushing switches, 15/32-32 thread. 2 Hardware items are sold for use with Eaton switches only.

4 4 4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-33

4.8 4

Toggle Switches Accessories

Indicating Plates Product Selection—Indicating Plates for 15/32-Inch Bushing Mounted Switches

4 4 4

Keyway Location

Marking Opposite Keyway

Keyway Side

Material

Finish

Catalog Number

Keyway on bottom

ON

OFF

0.032 in steel

Plain

30-5632

Statuary bronze

30-5632-3

Burnished nickel

30-5632-4

0.032 in brass

Black cupric oxide 1

30-2899-3

0.032 in steel

Statuary bronze

30-5632-7

Burnished nickel

30-5632-6

Burnished nickel

30-5632-11

4 4

RAD

4

RUN

START

HOT

COLD

30-5632-15

4

HI

LOW

30-5632-16

4

ON

STOP

FOR

REV

4

AUTO

TEST

30-2899-6

PUSH

START

30-2899-7

4

RUN

TEST

BLANK

BLANK

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-8

ON

OFF

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-13

OFF

ON

4

Keyway on side

4

Keyway on top

4 4 4

Keyway on top

PHO

0.032 in steel

30-5632-17 0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-2899-2

30-2899-9

30-2899-8

T

B

OFF

ON

0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-12 30-5632-14

SET

RUN

30-2899-10

BLANK

RESET

O

I

I

O

30-2899-12 0.032 in steel

Burnished nickel

30-5632-23 30-5632-19

4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4 4

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches Indicating Plate ON 1 16

15 Dia. 32

1 32

OFF

1

11 32 5 Dia. 8

Note 1 White lettering.

4 4 4 4 V11-T4-34

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

4.9

Toggle Switches Technical Data

SinglePole

TwoPole

FourPole

1 2 3

1 2 3

4 5 6

1 2 3

4 5 6

7 8 9

Terminal Identification

Toggle Circuit Diagrams

When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified.

Circuit Letter

All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard.

10 11 12

“Three Independent” ON-ON-ON Circuit Diagram For switch modified with “Three Independent” ON-ON-ON special circuit. External jumpers are required. User to connect wiring per instructions given below. ON-ON-ON Special Circuit Connection Points Connect common to terminals

2

Connect circuit “A” to terminals

6

Connect circuit “B” to terminals

4

Connect circuit “C” to terminals

1

A 1PST

B 1PDT

C 2PST

D 2PDT

No. of Poles Circuit A

1 PDT

1

3

6

4 4 4 4

L 2PST

4 5 6

2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12

7 10 8 11 9 12

1 4 2 5 3 6

G3 1PST

4

M 2PST

2

4

4

1

3

4

2 4

4

1 3

4

N6 2PDT

4 4 4

P 1PDT

2 CENTER Position (Maintained)

Circuit B

DOWN Position (Keyway)

H4 1PDT

2 3

2

3

1

2

3

1

2

3

4

5

6

4

5

6

4

5

6

Circuit Diagrams

4

6 4

Circuit C

1

Q7 2 Circuit

6

B A

C C

4 NC NO H G NC NO

4 4

Toggle Switch Type

Special General Purpose Toggle Circuits Circuit Number

Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever

4 4

Center terminal and switch lever

A

Bulb

4

Momentary contact

B 7571

A B 7555

4

Toggle Switch Legend Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever

7530

4

Legends Legend

Schematic

4

K 1PDT

3

UP Position

4

4

1 2 3

E 4PST 1

1

J 1PST

5 6

2 3

4

Schematic

I 2 Circuit 5

1 2 3

Circuit with Lever in … 3 ON Independent

Circuit Letter

2 3

F 4PDT 2

Single-Pole

Schematic

4

Denotes mechanical contact portion Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

4 4 4 4

A

4

B

4 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T4-35

Dimmers and Wipers Slide Control

5.1

Paddle and Slide Controls Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5.2

Paddle Control

V11-T5-2 V11-T5-2 V11-T5-3 V11-T5-3

5 5 5

Rotary Wipers Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-4 V11-T5-5 V11-T5-6

5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Rotary Wiper

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-1

5.1 5

Dimmers and Wipers Paddle and Slide Controls

Contents

Paddle and Slide Controls

Description

5

Page

Paddle and Slide Controls Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-3 V11-T5-3

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Product Description Eaton’s unique family of dimmer and wiper controls are field proven to be the market’s most dependable controls. Although originally designed for the heavy truck market, applications in various other types of

vehicles exist. Paddle and slide versions are available and both have the look, feel and durability associated with our controls. Bezels and actuators are molded in a soft matte finish. Illuminated and non-illuminated versions are

available. Board-mounted LEDs located behind a laseretched panel provide illumination. Customized light panel lettering and custom pad printed bezels are also available. Both dimmer and wiper controls are

designed to complement the NGR family of switches. Note: Specific frame options are available that allow product to mount in NGR gang mount system. Contact your local Eaton Sales Representative.

5

Catalog Number Selection

5

How To Order—Paddle and Slide Controls

5

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

5 5 5

Control Type D = Dimmer W = Wiper Actuator Type P = Paddle S = Slide

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Application Voltage 12 = 12V 24 = 24V

D

Amperage Rating and Voltage 1 3 4 5 6 8 10 W

= 3A, 24V = 4A, 12V = 5A, 24V = 6A, 12V = 8A, 12V = 10A, 12V = Wiper

P 24 Bezel Print Style A = Style A B = Style B C = Style C D = Style D

5 C

A

Connector Type Packard No. A = 12020398 B = 12015345 C = 174930-1 D = 12034295 E = Leads only

D

G

Connector and Leads Only Detail Dimmer connector Dimmer and wiper connector Dimmer connector Wiper connector Dimmer only

Bezel Print Style 4 PANEL

B R I G H T D I M

Code A

WIPER W I P E R O F F

W A S H

PANEL 0 1 2

Code B

Code C

Code D

Notes 1 Amperage ratings for dimmers only. 2 Maximum dwell time describes the average time constant for delayed wiper activation. 3 Maximum nominal dwell. 4 Custom pad print available for bezel or button.

V11-T5-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Circuit Board 2 D = Dimmer L = 18 sec. 3 S = 10 sec. 3

G Y R X

LED Color = Green = Yellow = Red = Nonilluminated

5.1

Dimmers and Wipers Paddle and Slide Controls

Technical Data and Specifications

5

Paddle and Slide Controls Description

Specification

5

Ratings (dimmer only)

4, 6, 8, 10A at 14 Vdc 3, 5A at 28 Vdc

5

Mechanical life

100,000 operations, maximum

Operating temperature range

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

5

Base material

High-grade thermoplastic molding material

Mounting means

Snap-in mounting with plastic bezel

Mounting hole

Rectangular panel cutout: 1.734 x 0.867 in (44.00 x 22.00 mm)

5

Panel thickness Paddle

0.030 to 0.190 in (0.762 x 4.80 mm)

5

Slide

5

0.030 to 0.080 in (0.762 x 2.03 mm)

Approximate weight

5

1.5 oz

5

Dimensions

5

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) Paddle Control 1.960 (49.78)

R 0.156 Typ (R 3.96)

5

B R I G H T

D I M

Lettering to be white. Lettering style to be Helvetica Swiff Condensed 14 pt.

WIPER

PANEL

W I P E R

O F F

1.024 (26.01)

5

Slide Control

0.675 1.024 (17.15) (26.01)

5

W A S H

0.448 (11.38) 1.663 (42.24)

Symbol and lettering to be stamped in white. “WIPER” and “WASH” lettering style to be 12 pt. Univers 59. OFF lettering to be 10 pt. Univers 59. Custom lettering is also available.

0.100 (2.54)

50° ± 5° 0.214 (5.44)

1.332 (33.83) 1.582 (40.18)

5

Blue

0.454 (11.53)

0.100 (2.54)

5

0.800 (20.32)

1.019 ± 0.020 (25.88 ± 0.51) 1.718 (43.64)

5

R 0.080 Typ (R 2.03)

R 0.090 Typ (R 2.29) 0.857 (21.79) 2 Places

0.745 (18.92)

5

Black

1.965 (49.91) See Detail A

5

0.778 (19.76) Travel

5 5

0.867 ± 0.005 (22.02 ± 0.13)

5

Black 0.320 (8.13)

White

Blue Yellow

Terminal Identification: Positive (+) (blue wire) Negative (–) (black wire) Load (yellow wire) Positive (+) LED light (blue wire) Washer (white wire) washer only Negative (–) LED light (black wire)

1.650 (41.91)

5

1.734 ± 0.005 (44.04 ± 0.127)

5

2.680 (68.07)

1.302 (33.07)

Yellow

5

Panel Opening

Blue

5

0.964 (24.49) Ref

5

Black Terminal Identification: Positive (+) (blue wire) Negative (–) (black wire) Load (yellow wire) Positive (+) LED light (blue wire) Open position Negative (–) LED light (black wire)

Detail A Typ 2 Plcs

5

C of Pivot Point

5 5 5

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-3

5.2 5

Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers

Contents

Rotary Wiper

Description

5

Page

Rotary Wipers Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5

V11-T5-5 V11-T5-6

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5

Product Description

Features

The rotary wiper has been designed to be a highly durable rotary wiper control for the transportation industry. The RW200 series wiper has four wiper control

5

positions via a rotating knob: Off, Intermittent, Continuous Low Speed and Continuous High Speed. The device has a washer function that operates the washer pump and wiper while the knob is depressed.





Options

Load Dump Protection ● The switch will withstand a 120V load dump per SAE J1455 Reverse Voltage Protection ● The device will not be damaged when exposed to 12 Vdc for 5 minutes

5 5

Product Selection

5

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

5

Rotary Wiper Code Numbers and Letters

5

Series

Code

Voltage

Code

5

12064752

5 5

Packard Connectors

12977042 RW

RW

12 Vdc

6294544 and 2977048

5

12A

12B

200 6288538

5

Code

12C

12D

Bushing Length in Inches (mm)

Code

Catalog Number

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012AA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012AB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012BA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012BB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012CA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012CB

0.261 (6.63)

A

RW20012DA

0.424 (10.77)

B

RW20012DB

5 5 5 5 5 V11-T5-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

● ● ● ●

Variable bushing length Variable spindle length Choice of connectors Pad printing on knob

Standards and Certifications Meets SAE standards J1455, J1944 and J1988.

Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers

5.2

Technical Data and Specifications

5

Rotary Wipers

5

Description

Specification

Operating voltage range

9 Vdc to 16 Vdc

Continuous load rating

17A from –40° to 73°F (–40° to 23°C) Derated to 5A at 185°F (85°C)

Wiper electromechanical life

50,000 cycles

Electrical cycle life

250,000 cycles in the Intermittent position 300,000 cycles combined in the Low and High positions

Operating temperature

–40° to 185°F (–40° to 85°C)

Humidity rating

Device will operate properly at 98% humidity between –40° and 100°F (–40° and 38°C)

Mechanical shock

The switch will withstand a 3 ft drop on concrete

5

Vibration

The device will operate properly while being exposed to 133 hours of 1G rms vibration along all three axes, sweeping from 5 Hz to 1500 Hz at one octave per minute

5

5 5 5 5

5

Connector Drawings

5 5 5 5 12064752

12977042

5

6288538

5 5 5 5 2977048

6294544

Circuit Continuity

Wire Terminations

Switch Position

Circuit Continuity

Wire Color

Switch Connections

Off

Open

Yellow

Motor low speed terminal

Intermittent

Yellow—Red and brown

White

Motor high speed terminal

Low speed

Yellow

Blue

Motor park terminal

High speed

White

Black

Ground

Brown

Brown

Washer pump

Red—Positive

Red

+12 Vdc (positive)

Washer

5 5 5 5 5 5

Black—Negative

5 5 5 5 5 5 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T5-5

5.2 5 5

Dimmers and Wipers Rotary Wipers

Dimensions Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) RW200 Series

5 5

Off/Park 20º

5

Washer (Push In)

5

WIPER WASHER

5

70º

1.176 +0.010 –0.025 (29.87 +0.25 –0.64) Dia. Fastest Intermittent Speed

20º Continuous Low Speed 20º Ref Continuous Fast Speed

5

0.248 (6.30) Dia. EATON

5

Slowest Intermittent Speed

2.188 (55.57)

0.370 (9.40) Flats

2.188 (55.57) View B

5

1.358 (34.50)

5

0.609 +0.010 –0.015 (15.47 +0.25 –0.38)

5

0.424 (10.77) 3.029 +0.006 –0.010 (76.94 +0.15 –0.25)

0.099 (2.51)

5

2.230 (56.64) 1.805 (45.84)

5 5 5

Yellow Lead

5

Blue Lead

3.335 (84.71) Approx.

5

Black Lead

5

White Lead

Red Lead Brown Lead

4.505 (114.43) Approx.

5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 5 V11-T5-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons AC Rated Pushbuttons

6.1

AC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6.2

Illuminated AC/DC Rated Pushbuttons

V11-T6-2 V11-T6-2 V11-T6-2 V11-T6-3 V11-T6-4 V11-T6-5

6 6 6 6

Illuminated AC/DC Rated Product Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Standards and Certifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Product Selection Guide . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 580/581/586 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 770/775 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6

V11-T6-8 V11-T6-8 V11-T6-8 V11-T6-9 V11-T6-10 V11-T6-11 V11-T6-12 V11-T6-13 V11-T6-14 V11-T6-16 V11-T6-17 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-19

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-1

6.1 6

Pushbuttons AC Rated

Contents

AC Rated

Description

6

Page

AC Rated Product Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 6

V11-T6-3 V11-T6-4 V11-T6-5

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Product Description

Features

These general-purpose, AC rated, pushbutton switches offer a wide variety of configurations, button styles and termination types. The 7835 and 7836 light-duty series pushbutton switches are AC only. They feature slow-make/slow-break butttype contacts with a light operating pressure that is particularly suited to instrumentation applications.





Circuits ● 1PST, 1PDT, 2PDT ● Momentary action Terminal Types ● Screw terminals, brass (furnished unassembled) ●



8410/8411 Series – #5-40 x 3/16 in (Cat. No. 811-7206)



8406/8440 Series – #5-40 x 5/32 in screws (Cat. No. 11-26)



Solder lug, brass silverplated

6 6 6 6

8448 Series – #6-32 x 3/16 in binding head screws (Cat. No. 811-2)



Hardware supplied ● One hexagon locknut (Cat. No. 15-192) and one bright nickel-plated knurled facenut (Cat. No. 15-124F1) ● 8411/8418 Series has a bright nickel-plated hexagon facenut (Cat. No. 15-966-2) ● All hardware is furnished unassembled ● Other mounting types are flush, nest and snap-in

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Standards and Certifications 1 ● ● ●

UL® Recognized CSA® Certified RoHS 2

Notes 1 Except where noted. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

Pushbuttons AC Rated

6.1

Product Selection

6

Non-Illuminated

6

Light-Duty, Momentary Contact Flush Mounted Flush Rating

Poles and Throw

1PST

Contacts

Circuit Number 1

Button Construction

Color

NC

A

Nylon

Black

Button Extension Dimensions “B” in Inches (mm)

Typical Max. Operating Force

Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog “A” in Inches (mm) Number

0.468 (11.89)

0.7 lbs 3

Flush

8406K1

0.453 (11.50)

0.7 lbs 3

Flush

8410K1

6 6

Screw Terminals 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc 3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc

Snap-in

6 6

Snap-in Mounted Rating

Poles and Throw

Color

Typical Max. Operating Force

Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog “A” in Inches (mm) Number

Nylon

White

0.375 (9.53)



Snap-in

8423K1 5

Nylon

White

0.375 (9.53)



Snap-in

8424K1 5

Button Construction

NC

A

NO

A

Contacts

6

Button Extension Dimensions “B” in Inches (mm)

Circuit Number 1

6

Spade Terminals (0.250 in) 3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc

Bushing

1PST

6

Bushing Mounted Rating

Poles and Throw

Contacts

6

Color

Button Extension Dimensions “B” in Inches (mm)

Typical Max. Operating Force

Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog “A” in Inches (mm) Number

Nylon

Black

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs 3

0.250 (6.35)

8411K5

6

Nylon

Black

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.468 (11.89)

8411K8

Metal



0.296 (7.52)

2.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8440K2 5

6

A

Metal



0.312 (7.92)



0.562 (14.27)

7835K11A 6

A

Nylon (snap-on)

Black





0.562 (14.27)

7835K11C

Red





0.562 (14.27)

7835K11D

A

Metal



0.312 (7.92)



0.562 (14.27)

7836K11A 6

A

Nylon (snap-on)

Black





0.562 (14.27)

7836K11C 6

Red





0.562 (14.27)

7836K11D 6

6

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.468 (11.89)

8411K7

0.375 (9.53)

1.5 lbs 4

0.468 (11.89)

8411K12

6

Button Circuit Number 1 Construction

6

Solder Lugs 3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PST

NC

3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc

1PST

NC

5A, 12 Vdc, 3A, 125 Vac 2

1PST

NO

3A, 125 Vac 1A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST

NC

3A, 125 Vac 1A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST

NO

A A A

Screw Terminals 3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc 5A, 12 Vdc, 3A, 125 Vac 2 3A, 125 Vac 1A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac

1PST 1PST

NC

A

NO NO

A

Nylon

Black

NO

NC 1PST

NO

0.296 (7.52)

2.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8440K3

Metal



0.312 (7.92)



0.562 (14.27)

7836K13A

0.312 (7.92)



0.562 (14.27)

7835K12A

Metal



0.312 (7.92)



0.562 (14.27)

7836K12A

Spade Terminals (0.250 in) 1PST 1/4A, 250 Vac/Vdc 3/4A, 125 Vac/Vdc 3A, 125 Vac

1PST 1PST

NO

A

NC

A

NO NC NO

A

Nylon Nylon Nylon

Red Black Black

4

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs 3

0.250 (6.35)

8411K13

0.468 (11.89)

8411K10

6 6

5

6 6

0.375 (9.53)

1.5 lbs 4

0.468 (11.89)

8411K11 5

0.250 (6.35)

1.5 lbs

0.250 (6.35)

8418K1 5

0.406 (10.31)

1.5 lbs

0.468 (11.89)

8418K12 5

Notes 1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18. 2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable. 3 To change operating pressure, refer to your local Eaton Sales Representative. 4 Operating pressure cannot be changed. 5 Combination spade and solder lug terminal. 6 Items are normally in distributor stock. 7 Standard length is 6 in (152.40 mm), stripped 0.625 in (15.88 mm).

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

6

6



A

6

6

Metal

Wire Leads 7 3/4A, 125 Vac 1A, 250 Vac 1/10 hp, 125 Vac

6

5

A 1PST

6

6 6 6 6 6

V11-T6-3

6.1 6 6

Pushbuttons AC Rated

Non-Illuminated Medium-Duty, Momentary Contact One-Hole

6

One-Hole Mounted Poles and Throw

Rating

6

15A, 125 Vac 1PST 10A, 250 Vac 1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

15A, 125 Vac, NO 10A, 125 Vac, NC 10A, 250 Vac, NO 5A, 250 Vac, NC 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 1/4 hp, 125 Vac

1PDT

NO

A

Metal



B

Metal

B

Typical Max. Operating Force

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac

2PST

NO

15A, 125 Vac 1PST 10A, 250 Vac 1/3 hp, 125–250 Vac

NO

15A, 125 Vac, NO 10A, 125 Vac, NC 10A, 250 Vac, NO 5A, 250 Vac, NC 1/2 hp, 250 Vac 1/4 hp, 125 Vac

1PDT NO, NC

15A, 125 Vac 10A, 250 Vac

2PST

Technical Data and Specifications

6

AC Rated

0.531 (13.49)

0.9 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8444K3

0.250 (6.35)

0.9 lbs

0.343 (8.71)

8444K4



0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8434K2

Bakelite

Black

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8435K2

C

Metal



0.250 (6.35)



0.343 (8.71)

8448K2 2

A

Metal



0.531 (13.49)

0.9 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8444K2

B

Metal



0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8434K1

B

Bakelite

Black

0.531 (13.49)

2.0 lbs

0.687 (17.45)

8435K1

NO

C

Metal



0.250 (6.35)



0.343 (8.71)

8448K1 2

Description

Specification

Ratings

See Product Selection tables on Page V11-T6-3 and the table above.

Contact material 3–6A rated

Movable, silver-plated copper Stationary, silver-plated copper

10–15A rated

Movable, silver-plated copper with fine or coin silver contact face button Stationary, copper with fine or coin silver contact face button

6

Wire leads

6

18 gauge, 6 in (152 mm) long, skinned 0.75 in (19 mm) Lengths beyond 6 in (152 mm) are additional charge

Mounting means—One-hole mount

6

Threaded bushing—0.468 in dia. 32 threads/inch (11.90 mm) Keyway—0.068 W x 0.035 D in (1.73 W x 0.89 D mm); provides anti-rotation feature Keyway on 7835/7836 Series is 0.080 W x 0.040 D in (2.03 W x 1.01 D mm)

Operating temperature range

0° to 150°F (–17.8° to 65.6°C)

6 6 6

Mounting or Bushing Length Dimensions Catalog “A” in Inches (mm) Number

NO, NC

6

6

Color

Button Extension Dimensions “B” in Inches (mm)

Spade Terminals (0.250 in)

6

6

Button Construction

Screw Terminals

6

6

Contacts

Circuit Number 1

Notes 1 For circuit number detail, see table on Page V11-T6-18. 2 UL and CSA Listing not applicable.

6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-4

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons AC Rated

6.1

Dimensions

6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

0.312 (7.92)

6

8410

7835K12A Keyway 0.080–0.085 W x 0.040–0.047 D (2.03–2.16 W x 1.02–1.19 D)

6

1.000 (25.40)

0.562 (14.27) 0.625 (15.88)

0.312 (7.92)

0.562 (14.27)

6

0.460 (11.68) Dia.

6

B 0.780 (19.81)

1.180 (29.97)

0.230 (5.84) Stroke

0.310 (7.87)

6

1.610 (40.89) 1.500 (38.10) 0.060 0.250 (1.52) (6.35) 1.100 (27.94) 1.060 (26.92)

0.090 (2.29) Dia. 2 Holes

0.060 (1.52)

6

8411K5 and 8411K13

0.250 (6.35)

0.150 (3.81) 2 Holes

6

0.650 (16.51) Dia.

1.060 (26.92) Dia.

0.310 (7.87)

6

0.290 (7.37) Dia. Button

1.120 (28.57)

8406

1.370 (34.80) 0.840 (21.34) 1.870 (47.50)

6

B

6.000 (152.40)

0.812 (20.62)

6

1.870 (47.50) 1.500 (38.10)

0.469 (11.89)–32 TPI

0.484 (12.29)

6

0.150 (3.81) Mounting Holes

0.343 (8.71)

6 6

1.250 (31.75)

6

0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02)

1.000 (25.40)

6 6

0.250 (6.35)

Spade Terminal

Screw Type Terminal

6 6

8411K11 and 8411K12

8411K7 and 8411K8 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.310 (7.87) Dia. 0.040 (1.02) 0.180 (4.57)

6

0.070 (1.78)

0.260 (6.60) Stroke

6

B

B

6

0.460 (11.68) 0.090 (2.29)

0.060 (1.52)

2.090 (53.09) 1.250 (31.75)

1.950 (49.53) 1.840 (46.74) 1.070 (27.18) 1.010 (25.65)

0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02)

0.032 (0.76)

Screw Type Terminals

2–#5/40 Binding Head Screw

0.340 (8.64)

0.032 (0.76)

0.340 (8.64)

6 6

0.650 (16.51) 0.670 (17.02)

6

Screw Type Terminals #5/40 x 0.188 (4.57) Large Binding Head Screw

6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-5

6.1 6 6 6 6 6

6

AC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8411K10 and 8418K12

0.310 (7.87) Dia.

8423 and 8424

0.340 (8.64) Stroke 0.040 (1.02) Max. Pre-Travel to Break Circuit

0.460 (11.68)

0.850 (21.59) Dia.

0.370 (9.40) Extension

0.030 (0.76) 0.670 (17.02) Dia.

0.370 0.300 (9.40) (7.62)

0.950 (24.13)

0.469 (11.91) 2.120 (53.85) 1.270 Dia. –32 (32.26) Threads per Inch

6 6

Pushbuttons

0.560 (14.22) Hex

1.350 (34.29)

0.850 (21.59) Dia.

0.340 (8.64)

0.240 (6.10)

0.340 (8.64)

0.740 (18.80) Dia. max.

Note: Use 0.780 (19.81) dia. hole on 0.060 (1.52) thick panel.

0.250 (6.35)

6 6 6

8418K1

0.220 (5.59) Stroke 0.310 (7.87) and Extension Dia.

0.469 (11.89) Dia. –32 1.750 1.270 Threads (44.45) (32.26) per Inch

6

0.030 (0.76)

6

0.460 (11.68) Dia.

0.560 (14.22) Hex

0.250 (6.35)

0.700 (17.78)

0.230 (5.95) 0.300 (7.62)

0.340 (8.64) 0.670 (17.02) Dia.

0.520 (13.21) Stroke 0.620 (15.75)

B

6 6

0.100 (2.54) 0.040 (1.02)

0.040 (1.02) Max. Pre-Travel to Break Circuit

6 6

8434K2 and 8435K2

0.030 (0.76) Ref

0.970 (24.64) 1.210 (30.73)

3–#6-32 x 3/16 LG Binding Head Screw

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway

Pushbuttons AC Rated

6.1

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 8440

6

8448K1 0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.230 (5.84) Dia.

0.030 (0.76) to 0.070 (1.78) Pre-Travel

0.030 (0.76) Button Depressed

0.290 (7.37) 0.460 (11.68)

6

0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact 0.250 (6.35) Stroke

6

0.300 (7.62) Dia.

6

0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32 Threads per Inch

6

#15-32 Threads 0.340 (8.64)

0.680 (17.27)

0.460 (11.68) Dia.

1.200 (30.48) 1.310 (33.27)

0.620 (15.75)

0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway

6 6

0.750 (19.05)

6 6

8442 and 8444 (Screw Terminals) 0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact

8448K2

0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32 Threads per Inch B

0.940 (23.88) 1.210 (30.99)

0.260 (6.60)

0.340 (8.64)

0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway 0.250 (6.35) Stroke

6

0.469 (11.91) Dia. –32 Threads per Inch

0.300 (7.62) Dia.

0.620 (15.75)

A

6

0.090 (2.29) Button Travel to Make Contact

6 6

0.460 (11.68) Dia. 0.040 (1.02) 0.070 (1.78) Keyway

0.760 (19.30)

1.060 (26.92)

1.320 (33.53)

6 6 6

0.750 (19.05)

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-7

6.2 6

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Contents

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Description

6

Page

Illuminated AC/DC Rated Catalog Number Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Lamp Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Technical Data and Specifications . . . . . . . . . . Terminal Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Circuit Diagrams . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Legends . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6 6 6 6

V11-T6-9 V11-T6-14 V11-T6-16 V11-T6-17 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-18 V11-T6-19

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Product Description Eaton offers a wide range of pushbutton switches for standard industry applications such as appliances, electronics, medical and test instrumentation, office equipment and many other commercial applications.

A variety of options are available such as illuminated and non-illuminated versions, colored lens caps, lamp styles and mounting styles.

6

Each pushbutton series offers a matching indicator for a consistent look. See the Product Overview tables to quickly identify the required product. Then, refer to the Catalog Number Selection and Product Selection tables to determine the catalog number.

6 6 6

Product Selection Guide

6

General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Series

206/208

Page

220/221/224

Page

231/234

Page

Standards and Certifications 1 ● ● ●

UL Recognized CSA Certified RoHS 2

Notes 1 Except where noted. 2 Visit www.eaton.com/vcbu for the most up-to-date list of verified part numbers.

580/581/586

Page

6

Pushbutton Selection—Switch

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-10

6

Pushbutton Selection—Indicator

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-9

V11-T6-10

6

Pushbutton Cap Selection

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

6

Circuit Diagram Letter (See Page V11-T6-18)

K, N

K, N

K, N

J, L, M

6

Series

6

Pushbutton Selection—Switch

V11-T6-11

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

6

Pushbutton Cap Selection

V11-T6-11

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

V11-T6-12

6

Pushbutton Selection—Indicator

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

V11-T6-13

6

Circuit Diagram Letter (See Page V11-T6-18)

Q

K, N

K, N

J, L

770/775

Page

810/815

Page

820/825

Page

6 V11-T6-8

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

860/861/845

Page

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Series 206/208, 220 and 221/224, 231/234

6 6 6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 206/220 1 and 221 1/231 1, Switch

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Base Prefix 206 = 206 Series illuminated 220 = 220 Series non-illuminated 221 = 221 Series illuminated 231 = LED display

206

Product Type K = Switch

K 1

1

9

Terminations 1 = Solder

Mounting 3

Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt.

0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 3 = Full barriers

Number of Poles 1 = 1PST 2 = 2PDT

Pushbutton Style 220 and 221 C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte

Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold 6 = 2PDT 2

1 2

D

Full/Top Lens Color All Series 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

03

05

S

Bottom Lens Color 206 Series Only 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

30 Pushbutton Height 206 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) split 220 and 221/231 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full

6 6

Lamp 206 7/220 and 221

6

Incandescent 5 Example: 30 28-3158 231 LED lamps 6 Example: 02 Red, 5 Vdc

6 6 6 6 6 6

231 M = Matte

6

How To Order—Series 208/224 1/234 1, Indicator

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Base Prefix 208 = 208 Series indicators 224 = 224 Series indicators 234 = 234 Series indicators

Product Type L = Indicator

Terminations 1 = Solder

208

L

1 2

Mounting 3 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 3 = Full barriers

Pushbutton Style 208/224 C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte

D

03

Full/Top Lens Color All Series 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

05

S

Bottom Lens Color 208 Series Only 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

30

6 6

Pushbutton Height 208 7 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full S = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) split 224/234 A = 0.190 in (4.8 mm) full

Lamp 208/224 Incandescent 5 Example: 30 28-3158 234 LED lamps 6 Example: 02 Red, 5 Vdc

6 6 6 6 6 6

234 M = Matte

6 6

Notes 1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code. 2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold. 3 Refer to Page V11-T6-16 for barrier information. 4 Not available with lighted display. 5 Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 6 Use two-digit item number, 01–19, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. 7 Accepts two bulbs

6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-9

6.2

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 580/581/586

6 6 6 6 6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 580/581, Switch

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

581

K

1

3

9 1

0

T

6 6 6

Base Prefix 580 = 580 Series non-illuminated 581 = 581 Series illuminated

Product Type K = Switch

6 6

6

Mounting 1 0 = Chamfered bezel 1 = Flat bezel Pushbutton Style M = Matte T = Translucent

Example:

Base Prefix 586= 586 Series indicators

Product Type L = Indicator

586

Terminations 1 = Solder

L

1

0

T 03

Mounting 1 0 = Chamfered bezel 1 = Flat bezel

Pushbutton Style M = Matte T = Translucent

6 6 6

Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 2

Pushbutton Height A = 0.270 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.330 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.440 in (11.2 mm)

Lamp Incandescent 3 Example: 30 28-3158

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

6

6

B 30

How To Order—Series 586, Indicator

6 6

1 = Solder

Contact Material 5 = Silver plate 9 = Gold plate

6 6

Terminations

Number of Poles 1 = 1PST NO 2 = 1PST NC 3 = 2PST NO 4 = 2PST NC 5 = 2PST NO/NC

6

6

Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt.

03

B 30 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 2

Notes 1 Flush with bezel. 2 Not available with lighted display. 3 Use two-digit item number, 30–37, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14.

6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-10

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbutton Height A = 0.270 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.330 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.440 in (11.2 mm)

Lamp Incandescent 3 Example: 30 28-3158

6.2

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 770/775

6 6 6 6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 770 1, Switch To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Base Prefix 770 = 770 Series illuminated

770

Product Type

K

1

1

9 1

Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt.

K = Switch

1

M 03

Terminations 1 = Solder

Number of Poles 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT

Mounting 2 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers Pushbutton Style

Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold

M = Matte

6

01 G 80

Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue

Pushbutton Height F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) full G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) full H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) full 2 3 S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) split

Lamp Incandescent 4 Neon 5 Example: 80 28-3157

Base Prefix 775 = 775 Series indicator

Product Type L = Indicator

Terminations 1 = Solder

1

1 2

Mounting 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers Pushbutton Style M = Matte

M 03 Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue

01 G

6 6 6 6 6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

775 L

6

6

How To Order—Series 775 1, Indicator

Example:

6

80 Pushbutton Height F = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) full G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) full H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) full 2 3 S = 0.36 in (9.1 mm) split

6 6 6 6

Lamp Incandescent 4 Neon 5 Example: 80 28-3157

6 6 6 6 6 6

Notes 1 Full or split cap style available. 2 Flush with bezel. 3 Not available with lighted display. 4 Use two-digit item number, 51–59, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 5 Use two-digit item number, 80 or 81, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.

6 6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-11

6.2

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Series 860 and 861/845, 810/815, 820/825

6 6 6 6 6

Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 860 and 861/810/820, Switch 1

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

6 6 6 6 6 6

Base Prefix 860= 860 Series non-illuminated 861= 861 Series illuminated 810= 810 Series illuminated 820= 820 Series illuminated Product Type

6 6

Action 1 = Mom. 2 = Alt.

6 6 6

1

Number of Poles 860 and 861 1 = 1PDT 3 = 2PST

Mounting 3

Contact Material 8 = Silver 9 = Gold 6 = 2PDT/2PST 2

6 6

03 B 02 Pushbutton Height 860 and 861 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7 810/820 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)

Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 4

Lamp 860 and 861 Incandescent 5 Example: 02 28-3154-2 810 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Example: 93 Red, 20 mA 820 Incandescent 5 Neon 8 LED 6 Example: 70 28-3156

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Base Prefix 845= 861 Series indicator 815= 810 Series indicator 825= 820 Series indicator

Product Type L = Indicator

Terminations 1 = Solder

845 L

Mounting 3 845 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 815/825 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers

1

2

D 03 B

Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 21 = Black 4

30

Pushbutton Height 845 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm) 7 815/825 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm)

Pushbutton Style C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte T = Translucent

6

6

D

Pushbutton Style C = Clear D = Deadfront F = Filtered M = Matte T = Translucent

860 and 861 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers 2 = Horiz. barriers 810/820 0 = No barriers 1 = Vert. barriers

820 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT NC

2

How To Order—Series 845/815/825, Indicator 1

6

6

9 1

Terminations

6

6

3

1 = Solder

810 1 = 1PDT 2 = 2PDT

6 6

K

K = Switch

6 6

861

Notes 1 Full cap style does not require a bottom lens code. 2 Pole one is silver, pole two is gold. 3 Flush with bezel. 4 Not available with lighted display. 5 Use two-digit item number, 02–14, from Incandescent Lamps table on Page V11-T6-14. 6 Use two-digit item number, 93–97, from LED Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15. 7 Not available with lighted display. Available only on “M.” 8 Use two-digit item number, 70, from Neon Lamps table on Page V11-T6-15.

V11-T6-12

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Lamp 815 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Example: 30 28-3158 825 Incandescent 5 LED 6 Neon 8 Example: 93 Red, 20 mA 845 Incandescent 5 Example: 37 28-3158-8

6.2

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Illuminated and Non-Illuminated Pushbutton Caps

6 6

Series 206/220/231 and Series 580/770/810/820/849

6 6 6 6 Catalog Number Selection

6

How To Order—Series 206/220/231, Pushbutton Caps

6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers. Example:

Base Prefix 206 = 2 lamp display (Series 206/208) 1 220 = Non-illuminated Series 220 and illuminated Series 221, 224 and 234 231 = LED display on Series 231 and 234

Product Type P = Pushbutton

206 P

C

03

Display Legend/Style C = Clear cap and color insert, transmitted color D = Deadfront, smoky gray cap and color insert F = Filtered color, white cap and color insert 2 M = Matte, no insert, transmitted color

04

6

S

Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 13 = Light green 15 = Clear 20 = Gray 4 21 = Black 4

Cap Height 5 A = 0.19 in (4.8 mm), full S = 0.19 in (4.8 mm), split

Base Prefix 580 = Series 580, 581, 586 6 770 = Series 770, 775 3 810 = Series 810, 815 820 = Series 820, 825 849 = Series 845, 860, 861

Product Type P = Pushbutton

6 6 6 6

To determine complete catalog number, start with the appropriate control type and add the appropriate code letters and/or numbers.

580 P

6 6

How To Order—Series 580/770/810/820/849, Pushbutton Caps

Example:

6

C

03

Display Legend/Style C = Clear cap and color insert, transmitted color 7 D = Deadfront, smoky gray cap and color insert F = Filtered color, white cap and color insert 7 M = Matte, no insert, transmitted color T = Transmitted color, smooth surface, solid color

04 B Full/Top Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 21 = Black 4

Bottom Lens Color 00 = Orange 01 = White 02 = Red 03 = Green 04 = Yellow 05 = Blue 10 = Amber 12 = Lunar white 15 = Clear 21 = Black 4

6 6

Cap Height

5

580 A = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) B = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) C = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) 770 F = Full, 0.36 in (9.1 mm) G = 0.27 in (6.9 mm) H = 0.12 in (3.0 mm) S = Split, 0.36 in (9.1 mm) 810/820 A = 0.33 in (8.4 mm) B = 0.44 in (11.2 mm) 849 A = 0.24 in (6.1 mm) B = 0.35 in (8.9 mm) C = 0.14 in (3.6 mm)

Notes 1 For a high degree of illumination, a full cap may be used with two lamp devices. 2 Available only with colors red, green, yellow and blue. 3 Available in matte only. 4 Not available for lighted display. 5 Measured from panel of top of pushbutton cap. 6 Available in translucent and matte only. 7 For two lamps, two colored inserts with divider.

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-13

6.2 6 6

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Lamp Selection Incandescent Lamps Bi-Pin Base for 800 Series

6

To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

6

02

7361

5

0.06

0.05

0.63

100,000

03

28-3154-3

7945

6

0.04

0.03

0.38

10,000

6

07

28-3154-7

7381

6.3

0.20

0.40

5.03

50,000

08

28-3154-8

7371

12

0.04

0.12

1.51

10,000

09

28-3154-9

7330

14

0.08

0.50

6.29

750

10

28-3154-10

7382

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

50,000

6

28-3154-2

6

11

28-3154-11

7370

18

0.04

0.15

1.89

10,000

12

28-3154-12

7327

28

0.04

0.34

4.27

7,000

6

13

28-3154-13

7387

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

25,000

14

28-3154-14

7876

28

0.06

0.34

4.27

25,000

6

Midget Flange Base for 770 Series

6

To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

6

51

28-3155-2

345

6

0.04

0.03

0.38

10,000

54

28-3155-5

394

12

0.04

0.12

1.51

10,000

6

55

28-3155-6

330

14

0.08

0.50

6.29

750

56

28-3155-7

382

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

50,000

6

57

28-3155-8

370

18

0.04

0.15

1.89

10,000

58

28-3155-9

327

28

0.04

0.34

4.27

7,000

6

59

28-3155-10

387

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

25,000

6

Subminiature Wedge Base for 200 and 500 Series To Order Lamp Item Number 1 Separately

ASA Lamp Number

Designed Volts

Design Amps

Brightness (MSCP) 2

Brightness (Lumens)

Lab Average Life (Hours) 3

30

28-3158

56

5

0.115

0.15

1.89

20,000

6

31

28-3158-2

79

6

0.20

0.60

7.92

1,000

32

28-3158-3

84

6.3

0.04

0.03

0.38

20,000

6

33

28-3158-4

86

6.3

0.20

0.40

5.03

20,000

34

28-3158-5

18

14

0.04

0.13

1.63

5,000

6

35

28-3158-6

73

14

0.08

0.30

3.77

15,000

36

28-3158-7

85

28

0.04

0.30

3.77

7,000

6

37

28-3158-8

17

28

0.06

0.65

8.17

5,000

6

6 6

Notes 1 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators. 2 Standard tolerance for MSCP is ±25%. 3 Average life is for AC operation. DC life will be approximately 50% less. Operating incandescent lamps at 5–10% below rated voltage will generally increase lamp life 200–400%.

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-14

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Neon Lamps 1

6

T 1-3/4 Bi-Pin Base Neon Lamp for All 800 Series “Shorty” Switches and Indicators 2 External Resistance Required

Ignition Voltage

DC

Average Useful Life (Hours)

AC

DC

Bulb Size

Lamp Length

Lead Length

150

1.5

25,000

47K (1/4 W)

95

135

T-2

0.60

0.25

CLC Lamp Number

Circuit Volts AC

70

7A1H

105–125

28-3156

6

Nominal Current MA

Item To Order Lamp Number 3 Separately

6 6

T 1-3/4 Midget Flange Base Neon Lamps for All 700 Series Switches and Indicators 2 To Order Lamp Item Number 3 Separately

CLC Lamp Number

Circuit Volts AC

DC

Nominal Current MA

Average Useful Life (Hours)

80

28-3157

A1H

105–125

150

1.5

25,000

35K (1/4 W)

None

95

135

T-2

0.67

81

28-3157-2

C-24

105–125

150

4.2

8,000

None

35K

95

135

T-2

0.67

External Resistance Required

Built-In Resistance

AC

DC

Bulb Size

Maximum Overall Length

Ignition Voltage

6 6

LEDs for Series 231 through 235 Switches and Indicators Voltage 5 Vdc

6

5 Vdc

Yellow

Green

6 6

LEDs are sold installed only.

Red

6 6

LED Lamps 4

Color

6

Without Diode Protection Item Number

With Diode Protection Item Number

01

11

02

12

15 Vdc

03

13

Vdc 6

04

14

5 Vdc

05

15

15 Vdc

06

16

Vdc 6

07

17

5 Vdc

08

18

15 Vdc

09

19

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

T 1-3/4 Wire LEDs for All 800 Series Switches and Indicators Luminous Intensity (MCD)

Item Number 3 Color

Forward Current (MA) 5

Minimum

93

Red

20

95

Green

96 97

Typical

Forward Voltage (V) Typical

Diffused or Undiffused

6

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

6

Yellow

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

Amber

20

80

160

1.7

Undiffused

6 6

Notes 1 Neon lamps are not recommended for use with colored caps or inserts, especially those colored green or blue. 2 Recommended external series resistor values shown for indicated average useful life are for lamp and resistor combinations used across 110–125 Vac, 1/4 W, ±10% tolerance. 3 Use this two-digit number for installation in switches and indicators. 4 For use with clear or white cap only. 5 5 Vdc and 15 Vdc include internal current limiting resistor. Other voltages available—contact your local Eaton Sales Representative. 6 External current limiting required. User must include in circuit—to give current of 20 mA to LED.

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-15

6.2 6 6

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Mounting Barriers Ordering Guide Catalog Number Example: 200B1

6

When switches are individually mounted, add 0.10 in (2.54 mm) per switch to the appropriate bezel dimension. When switches are gang mounted, add 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to the appropriate bezel dimension for each switch mounted plus an additional 0.05 in (1.27 mm) to compensate for gang mounting.

6

Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers 12

6 6

Product Series 200

Product Type Barrier

Code B

Barrier Type and Description End—Short

Code

3

1

6

Center—Short 3

2

6

End—Long 4

3

6

Center—Long 4

4

Type 1

Type 2

Type 3

Type 4

6 6 6

Legending All legend markings are pad printed in accordance with the limitations below. Standard markings are of condensed gothic type, 1/8 in high characters, with white letters on blue, red and green translucent pushbuttons and black letters on white, yellow, orange and all filtered pushbuttons.

6

Legending

6

Pushbutton Size

Standard Pad Print Limitations

6

1/2 in square pushbuttons

2 lines, 4 characters per line

5/8 in square pushbuttons—full legend

3 lines, 6 characters per line

6

5/8 in square pushbuttons—split legend

2 lines, 6 characters per line

6

3/4 in square pushbuttons

3 lines, 7 characters per line

3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—full legend

3 lines, 9 characters per line

3/4 in x 1 in rectangular pushbutton—split legend

2 lines, 9 characters per line

6 6

Accessories

6

These snap-on pushbutton caps are made of molded plastic for use with grooved style switches. They are ordered separately for user assembly.

6

Snap-On Pushbutton Caps—Standard

6 6 6 6 6 6

Button Diameter in Inches (mm)

Catalog Number

Black molded

0.625 (15.88)

53-3338

Red molded

0.625 (15.88)

53-3338-2

Description

Notes 1 The full guard barrier is molded as an integral part of the switch body and is specified as a part of the complete switch catalog number. 2 An end barrier is attached to each side of housing. The center barrier is used between devices when gang mounting in a slot array. 3 For use with square devices and short side of rectangular devices. 4 For use with long side of rectangular devices. Use a center—long between switches if gang mounting.

6 6 6 V11-T6-16

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

6.2

Technical Data and Specifications

6

General Purpose Pushbuttons and Indicators—Illuminated and Non-Illuminated

6

Series

206/208

220/221/224

231/234

580/581/586

Ratings— Silver Contacts Gold Contacts

5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc

5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc 0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc

5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vdc 0.1A at 125 Vac/Vdc

Silver or Gold: 1A at 125 Vac Gold-plated contacts for low level

Action

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Switch Circuitry

Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT 2-independent lamp circuits

Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT

Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT

Double break 1PST or 2PST

6

Termination Types

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm)

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1

0.02 x 0.110 in (0.51 x 2.79 mm) 1

0.01 x 0.11 in (0.31 x 2.79 mm) 1

6

Pushbuttons

0.62 x 1.00 in (15.87 x 25.40 mm) Rectangular Full or horizontal split lens Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.63 in (15.87 mm) Square Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.63 in (15.87 mm) Square Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.50 in (12.70 mm) Square 3 heights above panel E 3 Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

Mounting

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.03 to 0.19 in (0.76 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting Choice of two bezel styles: Chamfered or Flat Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm)

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

One rectangular LED flush with cap Various voltages available Diode protection available

Two T 1-3/4 wedge base lamps Incandescent Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

Pushbutton Travel

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.19 in (2.29 mm)

0.17 in (4.32)

6

Series

770/775

810/815

820/825

860/861/845

6

Ratings— Silver Contacts Gold Contacts

10.5A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

3A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

3A at 125 Vac or 250 Vac 0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

6A at 125 Vac or 3A at 250 Vac 0.25A at 125 Vac or 30 Vdc

Action

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Momentary Alternate with positive latch down

Switch Circuitry

1PDT or 2PDT (2 circuit) 2-independent lamp circuits

Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT

Break before make 1PDT or 2PDT

Double break 1PST or 2PST, NO

Termination Types

0.02 x 0.125 in (0.25 x 3.18 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1 Epoxy sealed

0.02 x 0.11 in (0.64 x 2.79 mm) 1

Pushbuttons

0.73 x 0.97 in (18.54 x 24.64 mm) Rectangular Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.75 x 1 in (19.05 x 25.40 mm) Rectangular 2 heights above panel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

0.75 in (19.05 mm)

0.62 in (15.87 mm) Square Horizontal split legend (indicator only) 3 heights above bezel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

Panel mounting retained by molded sleeve and nut May be individually mounted or gang mounted in horizontal or vertical rows Panel thickness from 0.03 to 0.25 in (0.76 to 6.35 mm) Barrier mount available 4 Snap mount available

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Snap-in panel mounting Stainless steel retaining clips Panel thickness: 0.06 to 0.19 in (1.59 to 4.76 mm) Barrier mount available 4

Lamps

Accepts two T 1-3/4 midget flange base lamps Incandescent or neon Front relampable

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

One T 1-3/4 bi-pin base Incandescent, neon or LED Front relampable Lamp stationary to reduce mechanical shock to filament

6

Pushbutton Travel

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

0.22 in (5.59 mm)

6

Lamps

Mounting

Square 2 heights above panel 3 5 styles Plain, engraved or hot stamped 2

6 6

6 6 6 6 6 6

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Notes 1 Terminations are suitable for solder or female 110 connectors. Series 770: Solder only. 2 See Engraving and Hot Stamping table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information. 3 See Product Selection tables on Pages V11-T6-9–V11-T6-12 for more information. 4 See Series 200 and 300 Mounting Barriers table on Page V11-T6-16 for more information.

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

6 6 6

V11-T6-17

6.2 6 6

SinglePole

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

1 2 3

6 6 6

TwoPole

1 2 3

4 5 6

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6

FourPole

Circuit Letter

6

All views are rear of switch with keyway or at down as applicable. Terminal numbers 2, 2 and 5 and 5 and 8 are considered inboard terminals for single-, two- and four-pole switches respectively. All others are considered outboard.

Momentary contact

C 2PST

2 3

D 2PDT

1 2 3

E 4PST 1

F 4PDT 2

Legend

Rocker Switch Type Contact terminal—will make contact with switch lever Isolated terminal—does not make contact with lever Center terminal and switch lever Bulb

Denotes mechanical contact portion Notes 1 Poles 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 2 Poles 10, 11 and 12 may be eliminated for three-pole devices. 3 Dependent lamp. 4 Independent lamp. 5 Two circuit—indicates a special type of double-throw switch in which the two circuits being controlled may be independent of each other. 6 For 206 Series, an additional lamp is available. 7 Available in 1PDT or 2PDT.

Schematic

I 2 circuit 5

1

4

3

6

2

4

1

3

J 1PST

1 2 3

K 1PDT

5 6

L 2PST

4 5 6

2 5 8 11 3 6 9 12

7 10 8 11 9 12

1 4 2 5 3 6

G3 1PST

4

6 6

Pushbutton Legend

Circuit Letter

2 3

B 1PDT

6 6

Schematic

A 1PST

6 6

10 11 12

When specified on order, switches will have the terminals identified as shown in the illustration at right. Terminal markings will be ink-stamped on the side of the switch case and unused terminal positions will not be identified.

Pushbutton Circuit Diagrams

6 6

7 8 9

4 5 6

Legends

Circuit Diagrams

6 6

1 2 3

Terminal Identification

M 2PST

2 4 1 3

6

N 2PDT

P 1PDT

2 6

3 H4 1PDT

4 2 3

6

6

Q7 2 circuit

B A

C C

NC NO H G NC NO

6 6 6 V11-T6-18

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

6.2

Pushbuttons Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Dimensions

6

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm)

1.400 (35.56)

0.312 (7.92)

0.190 (4.83)

0.890 (22.61)

0.310 (7.87)

0.705 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

0.740 (18.80) 2

C

NO

NO

0.900 (22.86)

0.400 (10.16)

1.200 (30.48) 0.990 (25.15)

B

0.400 (11.18)

1.133 (28.78)

0.625 ± 0.010 (15.88 ± 0.254) 0.400 (10.16)

1.140 + 0.005 (28.96 + 0.127/ – 0.000) 0.600 0.800 (15.24) (20.32)

LEGEND LEGEND

0.625 + 0.010 (15.88 + 0.254/ – 0.000)

0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max.

0.685 (17.40) Typ.

1.400 (35.56)

0.312 (7.92)

6

0.500 (12.70) Typ.

6 6

0.125 (3.18)

0.190 (4.83)

NC

NC

C NO

0.800 (20.32) Typ.

0.500 (12.70)

LEGEND

0.550 (13.97) 1.190 (30.23)

0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

0.600 (15.24) Typ.

6

0.730 (18.54)

0.960 (24.38)

0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

C NO

6

0.120 (3.05)

0.970 (24.64)

0.400 (10.16)

6 6

770 Series

220 Series

6 6

LEGEND

C A

6

A = 0.270 (6.86) B = 0.330 (8.38) C = 0.440 (11.18)

NC

NC

0.740 (18.80) Typ.

6

580 Series

206 Series

6

2.200 (55.88)

F-S = 0.360 (9.14) G = 0.270 (6.86) H = 0.120 (3.05)

1.110 ± 0.005 (28.19 ± 0.127)

6 6

Panel thickness 0.030 (0.762) to 0.250 (6.35)

6

0.875 ± 0.005 (22.23 ± 0.127)

6 6

0.940 (23.88)

0.400 (10.16)

0.740 (18.80) Typ.

NC

0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ – 0.000) 0.800 (20.32) Typ.

NC

C C NO

NO

0.500 (12.70) LED

0.312 (7.92)

6

810 Series

231 Series

1.400 (35.56)

0.100 (2.54) 0.190 (4.83)

0.600 (15.24) Typ.

1.070 (27.18)

0.910 (23.11)

C

L

0.300 (7.62)

6

1.000 (25.40)

6

0.310 (7.87)

6

0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max.

C

L

6

LEGEND

0.750 (19.05)

0.750 + 0.005 (19.05 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

0.140 (3.56)

1.170 (29.72)

A = 0.330 (8.38) B = 0.440 (11.18)

0.875 ± 0.005 (22.23 ± 0.127) 1.110 ± 0.005 (28.19 ± 0.127)

6 6 6 6 6 6 6

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T6-19

6.2 6 6 6

6 6

Illuminated AC/DC Rated

Approximate Dimensions in Inches (mm) 820 Series 0.160 (4.06)

860 Series 0.940 (23.88) Typ.

0.160 (4.06) 0.660 (16.76)

6 6

Pushbuttons

0.025 (0.64)

0.310 (7.87)

A = 0.330 (8.38) B = 0.440 (11.18) 0.910 (23.11)

6 6

0.515 (13.08)

LEGEND

0.280 (7.11) 0.840 (21.34)

0.250 (6.35)

1.110 (28.19)

0.090 (2.29)

0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max.

0.010 (0.254) Rad. Max.

0.875 + 0.005 (22.23 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

LEGEND

0.280 (7.11)

0.750 (19.05) Typ.

0.875 + 0.005 (22.23 + 0.127/ – 0.000)

0.850 (21.59) Typ.

0.620 (15.75) Typ.

0.755 ± 0.005 (19.18 ± 0.127) 0.310 (7.87)

0.755 ± 0.005 (19.18 ± 0.127)

6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 6 V11-T6-20

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

A = 0.240 (6.10) B = 0.350 (8.89) C = 0.140 (3.56) 1.000 (2.54)

Definitions

7.1

Switch Terminology

7

Glossary of Terms Term

7

Definition

One Pole (1P)—Single Pole (SP)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of an electrical circuit.

Two Pole (2P)—Double Pole (DP)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in both conductors of the same circuit.

Two Circuit (2 CIR.)

A switch device that opens, closes or changes connections in a single conductor of two independent circuits.

Single Throw (ST)

A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at only one of the extreme positions of its actuator.

Double Throw (DT)

A switch that opens, closes or completes a circuit at both extreme positions of its actuator.

Normally Open (NO)

A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are open when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.

Normally Closed (NC)

A momentary type switch in which one or more circuits are closed when the switch actuator is at its normal or rest position.

Actuator

A lever, pushbutton, slide, trigger or other means to which an external force is applied to operate a switch mechanism.

Alternate Action (Double Action Push)

Push to make, then push to break a circuit.

7

Break-Before-Make

A non-shorting switch mechanism that opens or breaks a connection in a conductor before closing or making a connection in another conductor.

7

Make-Before-Break

A shorting switch mechanism that closes or makes a connection in a conductor before opening or breaking a previous connection in another conductor.

7

Life Expectancy

The useful life cycle performance of a switch mechanism to open or close, make or break, an electrical circuit, based on statistical probability.

7

Operating Force

The force that must be applied to the actuator to move it from the free position to the operating position.

Operate Position

The position of the actuator at which the circuit transfers.

7

Release Force

In a momentary type switch, the value to which the force on the actuator must be reduced to allow the contacts to return to the normal or rest position.

7

Momentary Action Switches

Momentary action switches turn a process ON and OFF when force is applied and then removed. The applied force can make the circuit change state and the removed force returns circuit to its original state.

7

Maintained Action Switches

A type of device in which the switch or button physically keeps the circuit in the actuated position.

Half-Throw Circuit

A circuit where the actuator has only two positions (center and one extreme position) with a positive stop that prevents actuator movement to the opposite extreme position.

7

7 7 7 7

7

Approval Marks 1 Mark

EN EC

7 7

Country/Region

Definition

U.S.A.

UL® Recognized Listing Number: Switches—E24354 or File E1148, WOYR2 1609; Indicator—E70176, E2702

Canada

UL Recognized Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Numbers: E2702, E180275, E43960 and E147754þ

U.S.A. and Canada

UL Recognized Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)

Canada

CSA®—Canadian Standards Associations (Certified) Listing Number: LR10538 or 45995, 9002 Class 6241

U.S.A.

UL Listed Underwriters Laboratories Incorporated; Listing Number:þE180275

7

Europe

ENEC: European Norms Electrical Certification; Listing Number: E2702 (but not all sections)

7



Restriction of Hazardous Substances (RoHS) Directive 2001/65/EU

7 7 7 7 7 7

7 7 7

Note 1 See specific product for specifications for applicable approvals.

7 7

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T7-1

7.2 7 7

Index

11-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33

2600_–2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48

13-5496 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7

2600H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51

13-8171 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-7

28-3154_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14

13-8173 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6, V11-T3-7

28-3155_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14

1500_–1507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-44

28-3156 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-15

7

1500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-45

28-3157_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-15

7

15-1043_–15-1047_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-3158_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-14

15-1048-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31, V11-T4-33

28-3425_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65

15-1049_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33

28-3426 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76

15-124F_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5148_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-65

15-1525_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5415_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-62

7

15-189-5 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5555_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-72

15-192_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5558 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76

7

15-2523_–15-2528_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5637-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76

7

15-2534-14_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5863_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-13

15-90 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5901_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-9

15-966-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5909_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-9

15-994-2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-31

28-5940 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-76

7

7 7

7 7

1600_–1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48

29-761-5_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32

7

1600H_–1620H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51

2CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15

1609_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-49, V11-T2-53

2N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14

7

1620HX_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-51

30-2899-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34

7

16-4183_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32

30-5632-_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-34

16-4778_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-32

32-2245 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-38

17-19263 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

32-341 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33

17-19264 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

3CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15

17-19544-2_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

3N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14

7

17-21159 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

53-3318_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

17-21160 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

53-3338_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16

7

17-21543 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-77

53-73 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9

7

17-22145 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40

580K_–581K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-10

17-22145_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40

580P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

17-22146 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40

586L . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-10

17-22152 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40

61-40_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9

17-24 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9

6CAP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-15

7

200B_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-16

6N_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14

206K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7071K_–7073K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-9

7

206P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

7300K_–7317K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-6

208L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7500K_–7510K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12, V11-T4-15

7 7

7 7

7 7 7

220K_–221K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7530K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13

220P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

7546K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12

224L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7555K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12

231K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7560K_–7569K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13, V11-T4-15

7

231P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

7570K_–7571K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13, V11-T4-15

234L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-9

7576K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12

7

2500_–2507_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-44

7580K_–7587K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-12

7

2500H_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-45

7590K_–7597K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13

25-13936_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-40

7630K_–7632K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13

V11-T7-2

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

Index

7.2

7660K_–7668K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

8423K_–8424K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3

7670K_–7674K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

8434K_–8435K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4

7690K_–7695K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14

8440K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3

7700K_–7705K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14

8444K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4

770K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-11

8448K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-4

770P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

845L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

775L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-11

849P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

7803K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-13

860K_–861K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

7804K_–7805K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14

8800K_ -8860K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

7810K_–7813K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28

8857K_–8859K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-5

7818K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-2

8928K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6, V11-T4-20

7835K_–7836K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3

8980K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-4

7842K_–7846K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6

B1600_–B1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50

7933K_–7935K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-14

B2600_–B2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-50

7990K_–7992K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-28

DP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2

8004K_–8005K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-66

DS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2

8006K _–8007K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-63

E30 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5

8055K_–8057K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-56

E32 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-8

8064K_–8065K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-73

E321 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9

810K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

E324 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-9

810P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

E33 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-12

8130K_–8138K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55

eSM_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-5, V11-T1-8, V11-T1-9, V11-T1-11

8140K_–8148K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55

eVu_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T1-15

8150K_–8155K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-55

MS25068_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

815L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

MS25098_–MS25100_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3

8166K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-9

MS25125_–MS25127_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-5

8179K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-42

MS25201_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

820K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

MS35058_–MS35059_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-4

820P_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-13

NGR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-8–V11-T2-33

825L_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-12

NGR Indicators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-14, V11-T2-15

8261K_–8262K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-3

NGR Rocker Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-11

8280K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20

NGR Switch Base . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-10

8283K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6

P1600_–P1607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48

8290K_–8295K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20

P2600_–P2607_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-48

8370K_–8373K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T3-6

RW_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-4

8370K_–8375K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20

SVR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T2-32–V11-T2-40

8381K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20

SW1RY_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-33

8391K_–8396K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-20

WP_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2

8406K_–8411K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3

WS_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T5-2

8418K_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T6-3

XTD_ . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . V11-T4-25

7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7 7

Volume 11—Vehicle and Commercial Controls CA08100013E—November 2012 www.eaton.com

V11-T7-3